libextractor-1.9/ 0000755 0001750 0001750 00000000000 13430052315 011062 5 0000000 0000000 libextractor-1.9/doc/ 0000755 0001750 0001750 00000000000 13430052315 011627 5 0000000 0000000 libextractor-1.9/doc/fdl-1.3.texi 0000644 0001750 0001750 00000056015 13312531357 013524 0000000 0000000 @c The GNU Free Documentation License.
@center Version 1.3, 3 November 2008
@c This file is intended to be included within another document,
@c hence no sectioning command or @node.
@display
Copyright @copyright{} 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
@uref{http://fsf.org/}
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
@end display
@enumerate 0
@item
PREAMBLE
The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
functional and useful document @dfn{free} in the sense of freedom: to
assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.
Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way
to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible
for modifications made by others.
This License is a kind of ``copyleft'', which means that derivative
works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It
complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
license designed for free software.
We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free
software, because free software needs free documentation: a free
program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the
software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals;
it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or
whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License
principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
@item
APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that
contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be
distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a
world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that
work under the conditions stated herein. The ``Document'', below,
refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a
licensee, and is addressed as ``you''. You accept the license if you
copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission
under copyright law.
A ``Modified Version'' of the Document means any work containing the
Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
modifications and/or translated into another language.
A ``Secondary Section'' is a named appendix or a front-matter section
of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall
subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall
directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in
part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain
any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical
connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal,
commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding
them.
The ``Invariant Sections'' are certain Secondary Sections whose titles
are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice
that says that the Document is released under this License. If a
section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not
allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero
Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant
Sections then there are none.
The ``Cover Texts'' are certain short passages of text that are listed,
as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that
the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may
be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
A ``Transparent'' copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
represented in a format whose specification is available to the
general public, that is suitable for revising the document
straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of
pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available
drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or
for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input
to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file
format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart
or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent.
An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount
of text. A copy that is not ``Transparent'' is called ``Opaque''.
Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
@sc{ascii} without markup, Texinfo input format, La@TeX{} input
format, @acronym{SGML} or @acronym{XML} using a publicly available
@acronym{DTD}, and standard-conforming simple @acronym{HTML},
PostScript or @acronym{PDF} designed for human modification. Examples
of transparent image formats include @acronym{PNG}, @acronym{XCF} and
@acronym{JPG}. Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be
read and edited only by proprietary word processors, @acronym{SGML} or
@acronym{XML} for which the @acronym{DTD} and/or processing tools are
not generally available, and the machine-generated @acronym{HTML},
PostScript or @acronym{PDF} produced by some word processors for
output purposes only.
The ``Title Page'' means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material
this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in
formats which do not have any title page as such, ``Title Page'' means
the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title,
preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
The ``publisher'' means any person or entity that distributes copies
of the Document to the public.
A section ``Entitled XYZ'' means a named subunit of the Document whose
title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following
text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a
specific section name mentioned below, such as ``Acknowledgements'',
``Dedications'', ``Endorsements'', or ``History''.) To ``Preserve the Title''
of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a
section ``Entitled XYZ'' according to this definition.
The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which
states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty
Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this
License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has
no effect on the meaning of this License.
@item
VERBATIM COPYING
You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies
to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other
conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use
technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further
copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept
compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough
number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and
you may publicly display copies.
@item
COPYING IN QUANTITY
If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have
printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the
Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the
copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover
Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on
the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify
you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present
the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and
visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition.
Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve
the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated
as verbatim copying in other respects.
If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent
pages.
If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering
more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent
copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy
a computer-network location from which the general network-using
public has access to download using public-standard network protocols
a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material.
If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps,
when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure
that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an
Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that
edition to the public.
It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the
Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give
them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
@item
MODIFICATIONS
You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under
the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release
the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified
Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution
and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy
of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
@enumerate A
@item
Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct
from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions
(which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section
of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version
if the original publisher of that version gives permission.
@item
List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities
responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified
Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the
Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than five),
unless they release you from this requirement.
@item
State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
Modified Version, as the publisher.
@item
Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
@item
Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
adjacent to the other copyright notices.
@item
Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice
giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the
terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below.
@item
Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections
and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice.
@item
Include an unaltered copy of this License.
@item
Preserve the section Entitled ``History'', Preserve its Title, and add
to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If
there is no section Entitled ``History'' in the Document, create one
stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as
given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified
Version as stated in the previous sentence.
@item
Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for
public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise
the network locations given in the Document for previous versions
it was based on. These may be placed in the ``History'' section.
You may omit a network location for a work that was published at
least four years before the Document itself, or if the original
publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
@item
For any section Entitled ``Acknowledgements'' or ``Dedications'', Preserve
the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all the
substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or
dedications given therein.
@item
Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers
or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
@item
Delete any section Entitled ``Endorsements''. Such a section
may not be included in the Modified Version.
@item
Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled ``Endorsements'' or
to conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
@item
Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
@end enumerate
If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material
copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all
of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the
list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice.
These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
You may add a section Entitled ``Endorsements'', provided it contains
nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
parties---for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a
standard.
You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a
passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list
of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of
Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already
includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or
by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of,
you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit
permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License
give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or
imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
@item
COMBINING DOCUMENTS
You may combine the Document with other documents released under this
License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified
versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the
Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and
list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its
license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but
different contents, make the title of each such section unique by
adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original
author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number.
Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of
Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled ``History''
in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled
``History''; likewise combine any sections Entitled ``Acknowledgements'',
and any sections Entitled ``Dedications''. You must delete all
sections Entitled ``Endorsements.''
@item
COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents
released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this
License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in
the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for
verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.
You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute
it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this
License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all
other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
@item
AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate
and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or
distribution medium, is called an ``aggregate'' if the copyright
resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights
of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit.
When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not
apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves
derivative works of the Document.
If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of
the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on
covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form.
Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole
aggregate.
@item
TRANSLATION
Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4.
Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a
translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include
the original English version of this License and the original versions
of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between
the translation and the original version of this License or a notice
or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.
If a section in the Document is Entitled ``Acknowledgements'',
``Dedications'', or ``History'', the requirement (section 4) to Preserve
its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual
title.
@item
TERMINATION
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void, and
will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license
from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally,
unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally
terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder
fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to
60 days after the cessation.
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that
copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after
your receipt of the notice.
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the
licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under
this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently
reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the same material does
not give you any rights to use it.
@item
FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions
of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new
versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See
@uref{http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/}.
Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number.
If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this
License ``or any later version'' applies to it, you have the option of
following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or
of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the
Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version
number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not
as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document
specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of this
License can be used, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of a
version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the
Document.
@item
RELICENSING
``Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site'' (or ``MMC Site'') means any
World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also
provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works. A
public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server. A
``Massive Multiauthor Collaboration'' (or ``MMC'') contained in the
site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC
site.
``CC-BY-SA'' means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0
license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit
corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco,
California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license
published by that same organization.
``Incorporate'' means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or
in part, as part of another Document.
An MMC is ``eligible for relicensing'' if it is licensed under this
License, and if all works that were first published under this License
somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently incorporated in whole
or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover texts or invariant sections,
and (2) were thus incorporated prior to November 1, 2008.
The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the site
under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1, 2009,
provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.
@end enumerate
@page
@heading ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
the License in the document and put the following copyright and
license notices just after the title page:
@smallexample
@group
Copyright (C) @var{year} @var{your name}.
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover
Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
Free Documentation License''.
@end group
@end smallexample
If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts,
replace the ``with@dots{}Texts.'' line with this:
@smallexample
@group
with the Invariant Sections being @var{list their titles}, with
the Front-Cover Texts being @var{list}, and with the Back-Cover Texts
being @var{list}.
@end group
@end smallexample
If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
situation.
If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
free software license, such as the GNU General Public License,
to permit their use in free software.
@c Local Variables:
@c ispell-local-pdict: "ispell-dict"
@c End:
libextractor-1.9/doc/texinfo.tex 0000644 0001750 0001750 00001167036 13321734764 014001 0000000 0000000 % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
%
% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
%
\def\texinfoversion{2013-02-01.11}
%
% Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006,
% 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
%
% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the
% License, or (at your option) any later version.
%
% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
% General Public License for more details.
%
% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
% along with this program. If not, see .
%
% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
% restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7
% of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3").
%
% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
% reports; you can get the latest version from:
% http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or
% http://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or
% http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page)
% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
%
% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a
% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
%
% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
% tex foo.texi
% texindex foo.??
% tex foo.texi
% tex foo.texi
% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
%
% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
% full Texinfo distribution.
%
% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
% they might have appeared in the input file name.
\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
\catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
\chardef\other=12
% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
\let\+ = \relax
% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
\let\ptexb=\b
\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
\let\ptexc=\c
\let\ptexcomma=\,
\let\ptexdot=\.
\let\ptexdots=\dots
\let\ptexend=\end
\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
\let\ptexexclam=\!
\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
\let\ptexgtr=>
\let\ptexhat=^
\let\ptexi=\i
\let\ptexindent=\indent
\let\ptexinsert=\insert
\let\ptexlbrace=\{
\let\ptexless=<
\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
\let\ptexplus=+
\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright
\let\ptexrbrace=\}
\let\ptexslash=\/
\let\ptexstar=\*
\let\ptext=\t
\let\ptextop=\top
{\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode
% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
% starts a new line in the output.
\newlinechar = `^^J
% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
%
\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
\let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
\else
\def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
\fi
% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
\ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi
\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
%
\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
%
\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
% Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful.
\chardef\spacecat = 10
\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat}
% sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences.
\chardef\ampChar = `\&
\chardef\colonChar = `\:
\chardef\commaChar = `\,
\chardef\dashChar = `\-
\chardef\dotChar = `\.
\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
\chardef\hashChar = `\#
\chardef\lquoteChar= `\`
\chardef\questChar = `\?
\chardef\rquoteChar= `\'
\chardef\semiChar = `\;
\chardef\slashChar = `\/
\chardef\underChar = `\_
% Ignore a token.
%
\def\gobble#1{}
% The following is used inside several \edef's.
\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
% Hyphenation fixes.
\hyphenation{
Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
spell-ing spell-ings
stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
wide-spread wrap-around
}
% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
\newdimen\bindingoffset
\newdimen\normaloffset
\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
%
\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt }
% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
%
\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
\def\loggingall{%
\tracingstats2
\tracingpages1
\tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
\tracingparagraphs1
\tracingoutput1
\tracingmacros2
\tracingrestores1
\showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging
\tracingscantokens1
\tracingifs1
\tracinggroups1
\tracingnesting2
\tracingassigns1
\fi
\tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
\errorcontextlines16
}%
% @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things
% aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message,
% after all.
%
\def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg}
\def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}}
% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
%
\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
\removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
\removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
\removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
%
\newif\ifcropmarks
\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
%
% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
%
\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc
\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor.
% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark.
% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark.
%
% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct.
% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase.
%
% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is
% described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two
% marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and
% one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK...
\def\domark{%
\toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}%
\toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}%
\toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}%
\toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
\toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}%
\mark{%
\the\toks0 \the\toks2
\noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6
\noexpand\else \the\toks8
}%
}
% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very
% first @chapter.
\def\gettopheadingmarks{%
\ifcase0\topmark\fi
\ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi
}
\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi}
\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi}
% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
\def\lastchapterdefs{}
\def\lastsectiondefs{}
\def\prevchapterdefs{}
\def\prevsectiondefs{}
\def\lastcolordefs{}
% Main output routine.
\chardef\PAGE = 255
\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
\newbox\headlinebox
\newbox\footlinebox
% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
\def\onepageout#1{%
\ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
%
\ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
\else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
%
% Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
% the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
\ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
\ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
%
{%
% Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
% take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
% before the \shipout runs.
%
\indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
\normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
% the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
% We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
% \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
% "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
% it needs to be
% {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym}
\shipout\vbox{%
% Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
\ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
%
\ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
\hsize = \outerhsize
\vskip-\topandbottommargin
\vtop to0pt{%
\line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
\nointerlineskip
\line{%
\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
\hfill
\vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
}%
\vss}%
\vskip\topandbottommargin
\line\bgroup
\hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
\ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
\vbox\bgroup
\fi
%
\unvbox\headlinebox
\pagebody{#1}%
\ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
% Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
% (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
% The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
\vskip 24pt
\unvbox\footlinebox
\fi
%
\ifcropmarks
\egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
\hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
\vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
\boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
\vbox to0pt{\vss
\line{%
\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
\hfill
\vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
}%
\nointerlineskip
\line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
}%
\egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
\fi
}% end of \shipout\vbox
}% end of group with \indexdummies
\advancepageno
\ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
}
\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
{\catcode`\@ =11
\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
\rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax
\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
}
% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
%
\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
\def\nstop{\vbox
{\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
\def\nsbot{\vbox
{\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
%
\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
\def\argtorun{#2}%
\begingroup
\obeylines
\spaceisspace
#1%
\parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
}
{\obeylines %
\gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
\endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
\argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
}%
}
% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
%
% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
% @end itemize @c foo
% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
% by \finishparsearg.
%
\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
\def\temp{#3}%
\ifx\temp\empty
% Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
\let\temp\finishparsearg
\else
\let\temp\argcheckspaces
\fi
% Put the space token in:
\temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
}
% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
% just before passing the control to \argtorun.
% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
%
% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
%
\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
% \parseargdef\foo{...}
% is roughly equivalent to
% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
%
% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
% favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03
\def\parseargdef#1{%
\expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
}
\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
\def#2{\parsearg#1}%
\def#1##1%
}
% Several utility definitions with active space:
{
\obeyspaces
\gdef\obeyedspace{ }
% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
% space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
% should produce a line of output anyway.
%
\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
% expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
\gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
}
\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this:
%
% \envdef\foo{...}
% \def\Efoo{...}
%
% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also
% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be
% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
%
% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The
% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
% special case.)
% At run-time, environments start with this:
\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
% initialize
\let\thisenv\empty
% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
% Check whether we're in the right environment:
\def\checkenv#1{%
\def\temp{#1}%
\ifx\thisenv\temp
\else
\badenverr
\fi
}
% Environment mismatch, #1 expected:
\def\badenverr{%
\errhelp = \EMsimple
\errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
}
\def\inenvironment#1{%
\ifx#1\empty
outside of any environment%
\else
in environment \expandafter\string#1%
\fi
}
% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
%
\parseargdef\end{%
\if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
\else
% The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal.
\expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
\csname E#1\endcsname
\endgroup
\fi
}
\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
{\catcode`@ = 11
% Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
% if the definition is written into an index file.
\global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
\gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
}
% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
% @* forces a line break.
\def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
% @/ allows a line break.
\let\/=\allowbreak
% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
%
\def\onword{on}
\def\offword{off}
%
\parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
\def\temp{#1}%
\ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
\else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
\else
\errhelp = \EMsimple
\errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}%
\fi\fi
}
% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
% the text is small, which looks bad.
%
% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
%
\newbox\groupbox
\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
%
\envdef\group{%
\ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
\errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
\errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
\fi
\startsavinginserts
%
\setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
% Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
% @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
% end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
% the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
% should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
% manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
\comment
}
%
% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
% above. But it's pretty close.
\def\Egroup{%
% To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
% and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
\endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
\global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
\egroup % End the \vtop.
% \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
\dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
% \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
\dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
% if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
% group, force a page break.
\ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
\ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
\page
\fi
\fi
\box\groupbox
\prevdepth = \dimen1
\checkinserts
}
%
% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
%
\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
where each line of input produces a line of output.}
% @need space-in-mils
% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
\parseargdef\need{%
% Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
% paragraph.
\par
%
% If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
\dimen0 = #1\mil
\dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
\advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
\ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
%
% Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
% normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
% And a page break here is fine.
\vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
%
% TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
% main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
% empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
% page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
% page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
%
% There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
% page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
% sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
% almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
% good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
% example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
% document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
\penalty9999
%
% Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
\kern -#1\mil
%
% Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
\nobreak
\fi
}
% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
\let\br = \par
% @page forces the start of a new page.
%
\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
% @exdent text....
% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
% That's how much \exdent should take out.
\newskip\exdentamount
% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual.
%
\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
%
\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
\nobreak
\kern-\strutdepth
\vtop to \strutdepth{%
\baselineskip=\strutdepth
\vss
% if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
% make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
\ifx#1l%
\llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
\else
\rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
\fi
\null
}%
}}
\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
%
% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
% else use TEXT for both).
%
\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
\def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
\def\righttext{#2}%
\else
\def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
\def\righttext{#1}%
\fi
%
\ifodd\pageno
\def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
\else
\def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
\fi
\temp
}
% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). This command
% is not documented, not supported, and doesn't work.
%
\def\|{%
% \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
\leavevmode
%
% Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
\vadjust{%
% We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
% leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
\vskip-\baselineskip
%
% \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
% the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
\llap{%
%
% For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
\vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
%
% This is the space between the bar and the text.
\hskip 12pt
}%
}%
}
% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
%
\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
\def\includezzz#1{%
\pushthisfilestack
\def\thisfile{#1}%
{%
\makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
\turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion
\indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
\wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}%
\edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
%
% This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
% definitions, etc.
\expandafter
}\temp
\popthisfilestack
}
\def\filenamecatcodes{%
\catcode`\\=\other
\catcode`~=\other
\catcode`^=\other
\catcode`_=\other
\catcode`|=\other
\catcode`<=\other
\catcode`>=\other
\catcode`+=\other
\catcode`-=\other
\catcode`\`=\other
\catcode`\'=\other
}
\def\pushthisfilestack{%
\expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
}
\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
\expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
}
\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
\gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
}
\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
the stack of filenames is empty.}}
%
\def\thisfile{}
% @center line
% outputs that line, centered.
%
\parseargdef\center{%
\ifhmode
\let\centersub\centerH
\else
\let\centersub\centerV
\fi
\centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
\let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case
}
\def\centerH#1{{%
\hfil\break
\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
\line{#1}%
\break
}}
%
\newcount\centerpenalty
\def\centerV#1{%
% The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if
% @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe
% out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still
% prevent a page break here.
\centerpenalty = \lastpenalty
\ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi
\ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi
\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}%
}
% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
%
\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
% @comment ...line which is ignored...
% @c is the same as @comment
% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
%
\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
\commentxxx}
{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
%
\let\c=\comment
% @paragraphindent NCHARS
% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
%
\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
\def\noneword{none}
%
\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
\def\temp{#1}%
\ifx\temp\asisword
\else
\ifx\temp\noneword
\defaultparindent = 0pt
\else
\defaultparindent = #1em
\fi
\fi
\parindent = \defaultparindent
}
% @exampleindent NCHARS
% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
\def\temp{#1}%
\ifx\temp\asisword
\else
\ifx\temp\noneword
\lispnarrowing = 0pt
\else
\lispnarrowing = #1em
\fi
\fi
}
% @firstparagraphindent WORD
% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
% paragraphs.
%
% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
% By default, we suppress indentation.
%
\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
\def\insertword{insert}
%
\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
\def\temp{#1}%
\ifx\temp\noneword
\let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
\else\ifx\temp\insertword
\let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
\else
\errhelp = \EMsimple
\errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
\fi\fi
}
% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to
% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
%
% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
% paragraph.
%
\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
\gdef\indent{%
\restorefirstparagraphindent
\indent
}%
\gdef\noindent{%
\restorefirstparagraphindent
\noindent
}%
\global\everypar = {%
\kern -\parindent
\restorefirstparagraphindent
}%
}
\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
\global \let \indent = \ptexindent
\global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
\global \everypar = {}%
}
% @refill is a no-op.
\let\refill=\relax
% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
%
\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
\def\setfilename{%
\fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
\iflinks
\tryauxfile
% Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
\immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
\fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
\openindices
\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
%
% If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
% Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
\openin 1 texinfo.cnf
\ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
\closein 1
%
\comment % Ignore the actual filename.
}
% Called from \setfilename.
%
\def\openindices{%
\newindex{cp}%
\newcodeindex{fn}%
\newcodeindex{vr}%
\newcodeindex{tp}%
\newcodeindex{ky}%
\newcodeindex{pg}%
}
% @bye.
\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
\message{pdf,}
% adobe `portable' document format
\newcount\tempnum
\newcount\lnkcount
\newtoks\filename
\newcount\filenamelength
\newcount\pgn
\newtoks\toksA
\newtoks\toksB
\newtoks\toksC
\newtoks\toksD
\newbox\boxA
\newcount\countA
\newif\ifpdf
\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined.
\ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined
\else
\ifx\pdfoutput\relax
\else
\ifcase\pdfoutput
\else
\pdftrue
\fi
\fi
\fi
% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to
% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good.
%
% See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and
% related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user
% to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
% that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to
% do this reliably, so we use it.
% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements,
% which we \xdef.
\def\txiescapepdf#1{%
\ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined
% No primitive available; should we give a warning or log?
% Many times it won't matter.
\else
% The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses,
% backslashes, and other special chars.
\xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}%
\fi
}
\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot
be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
output) for that.)}
\ifpdf
%
% Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex,
% except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a
% very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead
% of actual black.
\def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
\def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
%
% k sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.);
% K sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s).
\def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}}
%
% Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
% so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
\def\setcolor#1{%
\xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
\domark
\pdfsetcolor{#1}%
}
%
\def\maincolor{\rgbBlack}
\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
\edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
\def\lastcolordefs{}
%
\def\makefootline{%
\baselineskip24pt
\line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
}
%
\def\makeheadline{%
\vbox to 0pt{%
\vskip-22.5pt
\line{%
\vbox to8.5pt{}%
% Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
\getcolormarks
% Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
}%
\vss
}%
\nointerlineskip
}
%
%
\pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}
%
% #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
\def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
\def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
\def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
%
% pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among
% others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if
% someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a
% bitmap.
\let\pdfimgext=\empty
\begingroup
\openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
\openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
\openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
\openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
\openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
\openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
\errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
\errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
\fi
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
\fi
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
\fi
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
\fi
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
\fi
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
\fi
\closein 1
\endgroup
%
% without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is
% included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
\immediate\pdfimage
\else
\immediate\pdfximage
\fi
\ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi
\ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi
\ifnum\pdftexversion<13
#1.\pdfimgext
\else
{#1.\pdfimgext}%
\fi
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
\pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
\fi}
%
\def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
% We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
% such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
\indexnofonts
\turnoffactive
\makevalueexpandable
\def\pdfdestname{#1}%
\txiescapepdf\pdfdestname
\safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
}}
%
% used to mark target names; must be expandable.
\def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
%
% by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as
% nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing.
\def\urlcolor{\rgbDarkRed}
\def\linkcolor{\rgbDarkRed}
\def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
%
% Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
% come from Petr Olsak
\def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
\else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
\def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
\advance\tempnum by 1
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
%
% #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
% outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number
% of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text,
% which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
% #4 is the page number
%
\def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
% Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
% page number. We could generate a destination for the section
% text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
% seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
\edef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
\ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
\def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
\else
\txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinedest
\fi
%
% Also escape PDF chars in the display string.
\edef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
\txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext
%
\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
}
%
\def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
\begingroup
% Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
\def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines
\def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
\def\thischapnum{##2}%
\def\thissecnum{0}%
\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
}%
\def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
\advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
\def\thissecnum{##2}%
\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
}%
\def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
\advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
\def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
}%
\def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
\advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
}%
\def\thischapnum{0}%
\def\thissecnum{0}%
\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
%
% use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
% al. a second time, below.
\def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
\def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
\def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
\def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
\def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
\def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
\def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
\def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
\readdatafile{toc}%
%
% Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
% The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
% subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
%
% We use the node names as the destinations.
\def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
\dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
\def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
\dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
\def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
\dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
\def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
\dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
%
% PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
% document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters,
% since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from
% Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from
% Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
%
% TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
% their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too
% much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents
% we use for the index sort strings.
%
\indexnofonts
\setupdatafile
% We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike
% Texinfo index files. So set that up.
\def\{{\lbracecharliteral}%
\def\}{\rbracecharliteral}%
\catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
\input \tocreadfilename
\endgroup
}
{\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2
\catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other
\gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]%
\gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]%
]
%
\def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
\ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
\else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
\advance\filenamelength by 1
\fi
\nextsp}
\def\getfilename#1{%
\filenamelength=0
% If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get
% snagged on things like "@value{foo}".
\edef\temp{#1}%
\expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax
}
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
\let \startlink \pdfannotlink
\else
\let \startlink \pdfstartlink
\fi
% make a live url in pdf output.
\def\pdfurl#1{%
\begingroup
% it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
% tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
% of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
% people have actually reported a problem with.
%
\normalturnoffactive
\def\@{@}%
\let\/=\empty
\makevalueexpandable
% do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
% special-casing \var here?
\def\var##1{##1}%
%
\leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
\endgroup}
\def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
\def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
\def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
\def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
\def\maketoks{%
\expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
\ifx\first0\adn0
\else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
\else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
\else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
\else
\ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
\ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
\let\next=\maketoks
\addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
\ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
\fi
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
\next}
\def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
{\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
\def\pdflink#1{%
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
\setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
\def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
\else
% non-pdf mode
\let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
\let\pdfurl = \gobble
\let\endlink = \relax
\let\setcolor = \gobble
\let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble
\let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
\message{fonts,}
% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
% italics, not bold italics.
%
\def\setfontstyle#1{%
\def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
\csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font
}
% Select #1 fonts with the current style.
%
\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
% Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since
% in those cases "rm" is bold. Sigh.
\def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}}
% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
% So we set up a \sf.
\newfam\sffam
\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
% We don't need math for this font style.
\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
%
\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
%
% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
\def\baselinefactor{1}
%
\newdimen\textleading
\def\setleading#1{%
\dimen0 = #1\relax
\normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0
\normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
\normalbaselines
\setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
\vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
}%
}
% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
%
% do nothing with this by default.
\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble
\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble
\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble
% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else
\begingroup
\catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
\catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
%%Version: 1.000
%%EndComments
/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
12 dict begin
begincmap
/CIDSystemInfo
<< /Registry (TeX)
/Ordering (OT1)
/Supplement 0
>> def
/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def
/CMapType 2 def
1 begincodespacerange
<00> <7F>
endcodespacerange
8 beginbfrange
<00> <01> <0393>
<09> <0A> <03A8>
<23> <26> <0023>
<28> <3B> <0028>
<3F> <5B> <003F>
<5D> <5E> <005D>
<61> <7A> <0061>
<7B> <7C> <2013>
endbfrange
40 beginbfchar
<02> <0398>
<03> <039B>
<04> <039E>
<05> <03A0>
<06> <03A3>
<07> <03D2>
<08> <03A6>
<0B> <00660066>
<0C> <00660069>
<0D> <0066006C>
<0E> <006600660069>
<0F> <00660066006C>
<10> <0131>
<11> <0237>
<12> <0060>
<13> <00B4>
<14> <02C7>
<15> <02D8>
<16> <00AF>
<17> <02DA>
<18> <00B8>
<19> <00DF>
<1A> <00E6>
<1B> <0153>
<1C> <00F8>
<1D> <00C6>
<1E> <0152>
<1F> <00D8>
<21> <0021>
<22> <201D>
<27> <2019>
<3C> <00A1>
<3D> <003D>
<3E> <00BF>
<5C> <201C>
<5F> <02D9>
<60> <2018>
<7D> <02DD>
<7E> <007E>
<7F> <00A8>
endbfchar
endcmap
CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
end
end
%%EndResource
%%EOF
}\endgroup
\expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{%
\pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
}%
%
% \cmapOT1IT
\begingroup
\catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
\catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
%%Version: 1.000
%%EndComments
/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
12 dict begin
begincmap
/CIDSystemInfo
<< /Registry (TeX)
/Ordering (OT1IT)
/Supplement 0
>> def
/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def
/CMapType 2 def
1 begincodespacerange
<00> <7F>
endcodespacerange
8 beginbfrange
<00> <01> <0393>
<09> <0A> <03A8>
<25> <26> <0025>
<28> <3B> <0028>
<3F> <5B> <003F>
<5D> <5E> <005D>
<61> <7A> <0061>
<7B> <7C> <2013>
endbfrange
42 beginbfchar
<02> <0398>
<03> <039B>
<04> <039E>
<05> <03A0>
<06> <03A3>
<07> <03D2>
<08> <03A6>
<0B> <00660066>
<0C> <00660069>
<0D> <0066006C>
<0E> <006600660069>
<0F> <00660066006C>
<10> <0131>
<11> <0237>
<12> <0060>
<13> <00B4>
<14> <02C7>
<15> <02D8>
<16> <00AF>
<17> <02DA>
<18> <00B8>
<19> <00DF>
<1A> <00E6>
<1B> <0153>
<1C> <00F8>
<1D> <00C6>
<1E> <0152>
<1F> <00D8>
<21> <0021>
<22> <201D>
<23> <0023>
<24> <00A3>
<27> <2019>
<3C> <00A1>
<3D> <003D>
<3E> <00BF>
<5C> <201C>
<5F> <02D9>
<60> <2018>
<7D> <02DD>
<7E> <007E>
<7F> <00A8>
endbfchar
endcmap
CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
end
end
%%EndResource
%%EOF
}\endgroup
\expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{%
\pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
}%
%
% \cmapOT1TT
\begingroup
\catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
\catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
%%Version: 1.000
%%EndComments
/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
12 dict begin
begincmap
/CIDSystemInfo
<< /Registry (TeX)
/Ordering (OT1TT)
/Supplement 0
>> def
/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def
/CMapType 2 def
1 begincodespacerange
<00> <7F>
endcodespacerange
5 beginbfrange
<00> <01> <0393>
<09> <0A> <03A8>
<21> <26> <0021>
<28> <5F> <0028>
<61> <7E> <0061>
endbfrange
32 beginbfchar
<02> <0398>
<03> <039B>
<04> <039E>
<05> <03A0>
<06> <03A3>
<07> <03D2>
<08> <03A6>
<0B> <2191>
<0C> <2193>
<0D> <0027>
<0E> <00A1>
<0F> <00BF>
<10> <0131>
<11> <0237>
<12> <0060>
<13> <00B4>
<14> <02C7>
<15> <02D8>
<16> <00AF>
<17> <02DA>
<18> <00B8>
<19> <00DF>
<1A> <00E6>
<1B> <0153>
<1C> <00F8>
<1D> <00C6>
<1E> <0152>
<1F> <00D8>
<20> <2423>
<27> <2019>
<60> <2018>
<7F> <00A8>
endbfchar
endcmap
CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
end
end
%%EndResource
%%EOF
}\endgroup
\expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{%
\pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
}%
\fi\fi
% Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2.
% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
% encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit).
% Example:
% #1 = \textrm
% #2 = \rmshape
% #3 = 10
% #4 = \mainmagstep
% #5 = OT1
%
\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
\csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
}
% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
\let\cmap\gobble
%
% (end of cmaps)
% Use cm as the default font prefix.
% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
% before you read in texinfo.tex.
\ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined
\def\fontprefix{cm}
\fi
% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
\def\rmshape{r}
\def\rmbshape{bx} % where the normal face is bold
\def\bfshape{b}
\def\bxshape{bx}
\def\ttshape{tt}
\def\ttbshape{tt}
\def\ttslshape{sltt}
\def\itshape{ti}
\def\itbshape{bxti}
\def\slshape{sl}
\def\slbshape{bxsl}
\def\sfshape{ss}
\def\sfbshape{ss}
\def\scshape{csc}
\def\scbshape{csc}
% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. (The default in Texinfo.)
%
\def\definetextfontsizexi{%
% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
\def\textecsize{1095}
% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
\font\smalli=cmmi9
\font\smallsy=cmsy9
\def\smallecsize{0900}
% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
\font\smalleri=cmmi8
\font\smallersy=cmsy8
\def\smallerecsize{0800}
% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
\let\titlebf=\titlerm
\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
\def\titleecsize{2074}
% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1}
\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT}
\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1}
\let\chapbf=\chaprm
\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
\def\chapecsize{1728}
% Section fonts (14.4pt).
\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
\let\secbf\secrm
\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
\def\sececsize{1440}
% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT}
\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT}
\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
\def\ssececsize{1200}
% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
\font\reducedi=cmmi10
\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
\def\reducedecsize{1000}
\textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM
\textfonts % reset the current fonts
\rm
} % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi
% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU
% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the
% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
%
\def\definetextfontsizex{%
% Text fonts (10pt).
\def\textnominalsize{10pt}
\edef\mainmagstep{1000}
\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
\def\textecsize{1000}
% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
\font\smalli=cmmi9
\font\smallsy=cmsy9
\def\smallecsize{0900}
% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
\font\smalleri=cmmi8
\font\smallersy=cmsy8
\def\smallerecsize{0800}
% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
\let\titlebf=\titlerm
\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
\def\titleecsize{2074}
% Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
\def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
\let\chapbf\chaprm
\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
\def\chapecsize{1440}
% Section fonts (12pt).
\def\secnominalsize{12pt}
\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT}
\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
\let\secbf\secrm
\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
\font\seci=cmmi12
\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
\def\sececsize{1200}
% Subsection fonts (10pt).
\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
\font\sseci=cmmi10
\font\ssecsy=cmsy10
\def\ssececsize{1000}
% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt).
\def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
\font\reducedi=cmmi9
\font\reducedsy=cmsy9
\def\reducedecsize{0900}
\divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs
\textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM
\textfonts % reset the current fonts
\rm
} % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex
% We provide the user-level command
% @fonttextsize 10
% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed.
%
\def\xiword{11}
\def\xword{10}
\def\xwordpt{10pt}
%
\parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
\def\textsizearg{#1}%
%\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
%
% Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
% makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
%
\begingroup \globaldefs=1
\ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
\else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
\else
\errhelp=\EMsimple
\errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
\fi\fi
\endgroup
}
% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
%
\def\resetmathfonts{%
\textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
\textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
\textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
}
% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
% of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
% current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
% \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
%
% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in
% the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
%
% This all needs generalizing, badly.
%
\def\textfonts{%
\let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
\let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
\let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
\let\tenttsl=\textttsl
\def\curfontsize{text}%
\def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
\resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
\def\titlefonts{%
\let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
\let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
\let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
\let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
\def\curfontsize{title}%
\def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
\resetmathfonts \setleading{27pt}}
\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}}
\def\chapfonts{%
\let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
\let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
\let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
\let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
\def\curfontsize{chap}%
\def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
\resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
\def\secfonts{%
\let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
\let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
\let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
\let\tenttsl=\secttsl
\def\curfontsize{sec}%
\def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
\resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
\def\subsecfonts{%
\let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
\let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
\let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
\let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
\def\curfontsize{ssec}%
\def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
\resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
\def\reducedfonts{%
\let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
\let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
\let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
\let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
\def\curfontsize{reduced}%
\def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
\resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
\def\smallfonts{%
\let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
\let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
\let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
\let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
\def\curfontsize{small}%
\def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
\resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
\def\smallerfonts{%
\let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
\let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
\let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
\let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
\def\curfontsize{smaller}%
\def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
\resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
% Fonts for short table of contents.
\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12
\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
% can fit this many characters:
% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
%
% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
% --karl, 24jan03.
% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
%
\definetextfontsizexi
\message{markup,}
% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
% this property, we can check that font parameter.
%
\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
% Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will
% define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes.
% \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost
% style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles
% currently in effect.
\newif\ifmarkupvar
\newif\ifmarkupsamp
\newif\ifmarkupkey
%\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp.
%\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp.
\newif\ifmarkupcode
\newif\ifmarkupkbd
%\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code.
%\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code.
\newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now).
\newif\ifmarkupexample
\newif\ifmarkupverb
\newif\ifmarkupverbatim
\let\currentmarkupstyle\empty
\def\setupmarkupstyle#1{%
\csname markup#1true\endcsname
\def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}%
\markupstylesetup
}
\let\markupstylesetup\empty
\def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{%
\expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup
\expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}%
\def#1%
}
% Markup style setup for left and right quotes.
\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{%
\expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
\csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
\ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi
}
\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{%
\expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
\csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
\ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi
}
{
\catcode`\'=\active
\catcode`\`=\active
\gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq}
\gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq}
\gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft}
\gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright}
}
\let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft
\let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright
%
\let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft
\let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright
%
\let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetcodequoteleft
\let\markupsetuprqkbd \markupsetcodequoteright
%
\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft
\let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright
%
\let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft
\let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright
%
\let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft
\let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright
% Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe
% (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d).
% The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it
% works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the
% lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the regular 0x27.
%
\def\codequoteright{%
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
'%
\else \char'15 \fi
\else \char'15 \fi
}
%
% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent.
% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like
% the code environments to do likewise.
%
\def\codequoteleft{%
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
% \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
\relax`%
\else \char'22 \fi
\else \char'22 \fi
}
% Commands to set the quote options.
%
\parseargdef\codequoteundirected{%
\def\temp{#1}%
\ifx\temp\onword
\expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
= t%
\else\ifx\temp\offword
\expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
= \relax
\else
\errhelp = \EMsimple
\errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}%
\fi\fi
}
%
\parseargdef\codequotebacktick{%
\def\temp{#1}%
\ifx\temp\onword
\expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
= t%
\else\ifx\temp\offword
\expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
= \relax
\else
\errhelp = \EMsimple
\errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}%
\fi\fi
}
% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq}
% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
% Font commands.
% #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant.
% If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl,
% and 2) do not add an italic correction.
\def\dosmartslant#1#2{%
\ifusingtt
{{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}%
{\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}%
\next
}
\def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl}
\def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it}
% Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following
% character) is such as not to need one.
\def\smartitaliccorrection{%
\ifx\next,%
\else\ifx\next-%
\else\ifx\next.%
\else\ptexslash
\fi\fi\fi
\aftersmartic
}
% Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic. @var is set to this for defuns.
\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}}
% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want
% ttsl for book titles, do we?
\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}
\def\aftersmartic{}
\def\var#1{%
\let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic
\def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}%
\smartslanted{#1}%
}
\let\i=\smartitalic
\let\slanted=\smartslanted
\let\dfn=\smartslanted
\let\emph=\smartitalic
% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
% @b, explicit bold. Also @strong.
\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
\let\strong=\b
% @sansserif, explicit sans.
\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
%
\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
%
\catcode`@=11
\def\plainfrenchspacing{%
\sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
\sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
\def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
}
\def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
\sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
\sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
}
\catcode`@=\other
\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
% @t, explicit typewriter.
\def\t#1{%
{\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
\null
}
% @samp.
\def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}}
% @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes.
\let\indicateurl=\samp
% @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same
% size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc.
% This is a subroutine for that.
\def\tclose#1{%
{%
% Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
\spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
%
% Switch to typewriter.
\tt
%
% But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
\def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
%
% Turn off hyphenation.
\nohyphenation
%
\rawbackslash
\plainfrenchspacing
#1%
}%
\null % reset spacefactor to 1000
}
% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
%
% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
% -- rms.
{
\catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
\catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
\global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions
%
\global\def\code{\begingroup
\setupmarkupstyle{code}%
% The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers.
\catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active
\ifallowcodebreaks
\let-\codedash
\let_\codeunder
\else
\let-\normaldash
\let_\realunder
\fi
\codex
}
}
\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
\def\normaldash{-}
\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
\def\codeunder{%
% this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
% is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
% will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
% (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
\ifusingtt{\ifmmode
\mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
\else\normalunderscore \fi
\discretionary{}{}{}}%
{\_}%
}
% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is bad.
% @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at -
% and _ on and off.
%
\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue
\def\keywordtrue{true}
\def\keywordfalse{false}
\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
\def\txiarg{#1}%
\ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
\allowcodebreakstrue
\else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
\allowcodebreaksfalse
\else
\errhelp = \EMsimple
\errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}%
\fi\fi
}
% For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary,
% so use \code rather than \samp.
\let\command=\code
\let\env=\code
\let\file=\code
\let\option=\code
% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
% itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url.
% (This \urefnobreak definition isn't used now, leaving it for a while
% for comparison.)
\def\urefnobreak#1{\dourefnobreak #1,,,\finish}
\def\dourefnobreak#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
\unsepspaces
\pdfurl{#1}%
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
\unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
\else
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
\ifpdf
\unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
\else
\unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
\fi
\else
\code{#1}% only url given, so show it
\fi
\fi
\endlink
\endgroup}
% This \urefbreak definition is the active one.
\def\urefbreak{\begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak}
\let\uref=\urefbreak
\def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish}
\def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example
\unsepspaces
\pdfurl{#1}%
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
\unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
\else
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
\ifpdf
\unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
\else
\unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
\fi
\else
\urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it
\fi
\fi
\endlink
\endgroup}
% Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only).
\def\urefcatcodes{%
\catcode\ampChar=\active \catcode\dotChar=\active
\catcode\hashChar=\active \catcode\questChar=\active
\catcode\slashChar=\active
}
{
\urefcatcodes
%
\global\def\urefcode{\begingroup
\setupmarkupstyle{code}%
\urefcatcodes
\let&\urefcodeamp
\let.\urefcodedot
\let#\urefcodehash
\let?\urefcodequest
\let/\urefcodeslash
\codex
}
%
% By default, they are just regular characters.
\global\def&{\normalamp}
\global\def.{\normaldot}
\global\def#{\normalhash}
\global\def?{\normalquest}
\global\def/{\normalslash}
}
% we put a little stretch before and after the breakable chars, to help
% line breaking of long url's. The unequal skips make look better in
% cmtt at least, especially for dots.
\def\urefprestretch{\urefprebreak \hskip0pt plus.13em }
\def\urefpoststretch{\urefpostbreak \hskip0pt plus.1em }
%
\def\urefcodeamp{\urefprestretch \&\urefpoststretch}
\def\urefcodedot{\urefprestretch .\urefpoststretch}
\def\urefcodehash{\urefprestretch \#\urefpoststretch}
\def\urefcodequest{\urefprestretch ?\urefpoststretch}
\def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish}
{
\catcode`\/=\active
\global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{%
\urefprestretch \slashChar
% Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of
% slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://.
\ifx\next/\else \urefpoststretch \fi
}
}
% One more complication: by default we'll break after the special
% characters, but some people like to break before the special chars, so
% allow that. Also allow no breaking at all, for manual control.
%
\parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{%
\def\txiarg{#1}%
\ifx\txiarg\wordnone
\def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
\else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore
\def\urefprebreak{\allowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
\else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter
\def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\allowbreak}
\else
\errhelp = \EMsimple
\errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
\fi\fi\fi
}
\def\wordafter{after}
\def\wordbefore{before}
\def\wordnone{none}
\urefbreakstyle after
% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
%
\let\url=\uref
% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
%
%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
\ifpdf
\def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
\def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
\unsepspaces
\pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
\ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
\endlink
\endgroup}
\else
\let\email=\uref
\fi
% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
\def\txiarg{#1}%
\ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
\else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
\else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
\else
\errhelp = \EMsimple
\errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
\fi\fi\fi
}
\def\worddistinct{distinct}
\def\wordexample{example}
\def\wordcode{code}
% Default is `distinct'.
\kbdinputstyle distinct
% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
% then @kbd has no effect.
\def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}}
\def\xkey{\key}
\def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{%
\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
}
% definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size.
%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
%\font\keysy=cmsy9
%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
% \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
% \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
% \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
% \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
% \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
% definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already
% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But
% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt.
%
\def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}%
\nohyphenation
\ifmonospace\else\tt\fi
#1}\null}
% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
% @clickstyle @arrow (by default)
\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
\def\click{\arrow}
% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
%
\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
% all-uppercase.
%
\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
{\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
\def\temp{#2}%
\ifx\temp\empty \else
\space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
\fi
\null % reset \spacefactor=1000
}
% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
%
\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
{\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
\def\temp{#2}%
\ifx\temp\empty \else
\space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
\fi
\null % reset \spacefactor=1000
}
% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
%
\def\asis#1{#1}
% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
%
% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
% which is what @var uses.
{
\catcode`\_ = \active
\gdef\mathunderscore{%
\catcode`\_=\active
\def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
}
}
% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \.
% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no
% particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care.
%
% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
%
\def\math{%
\tex
\mathunderscore
\let\\ = \mathbackslash
\mathactive
% make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
\let\"=\ddot
\let\'=\acute
\let\==\bar
\let\^=\hat
\let\`=\grave
\let\u=\breve
\let\v=\check
\let\~=\tilde
\let\dotaccent=\dot
$\finishmath
}
\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex.
% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
%
{
\catcode`^ = \active
\catcode`< = \active
\catcode`> = \active
\catcode`+ = \active
\catcode`' = \active
\gdef\mathactive{%
\let^ = \ptexhat
\let< = \ptexless
\let> = \ptexgtr
\let+ = \ptexplus
\let' = \ptexquoteright
}
}
% ctrl is no longer a Texinfo command, but leave this definition for fun.
\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
% @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}.
% Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex,
% except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about.
%
\def\outfmtnametex{tex}
%
\long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish}
\long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{%
\def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
\ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
}
% For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid
% setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for
% example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being
% ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal
% *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as
% well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the
% delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill.
%
\long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw}
\long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish}
\def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{%
\def\inlinerawname{#1}%
\ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
\endgroup % close group opened by \tex.
}
\message{glyphs,}
% and logos.
% @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}.
\def\@{\char64 }
\let\atchar=\@
% @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters.
% Unless we're in typewriter, use \ecfont because the CM text fonts do
% not have braces, and we don't want to switch into math.
\def\mylbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char123}}
\def\myrbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char125}}
\let\{=\mylbrace \let\lbracechar=\{
\let\}=\myrbrace \let\rbracechar=\}
\begingroup
% Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
% and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
\catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
\catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
\catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
!gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
!gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
!gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
!gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
!endgroup
% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
\let\comma = ,
% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
\let\, = \ptexc
\let\dotaccent = \ptexdot
\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
\let\tieaccent = \ptext
\let\ubaraccent = \ptexb
\let\udotaccent = \d
% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
\def\questiondown{?`}
\def\exclamdown{!`}
\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
\def\imacro{i}
\def\jmacro{j}
\def\dotless#1{%
\def\temp{#1}%
\ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
\else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
\else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
\fi\fi
}
% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.)
%
\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in
% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
% \scriptscriptstyle).
%
\def\LaTeX{%
L\kern-.36em
{\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
\vbox to \ht0{\hbox{%
\ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt
% for 10pt running text, \lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX.
% Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt.
\count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$%
\else
% For 11pt, we can use our lllsize.
\selectfonts\lllsize A%
\fi
}%
\vss
}}%
\kern-.15em
\TeX
}
% Some math mode symbols.
\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
\def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi}
\def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi}
\def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi}
% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do
% whichever is larger.
%
\def\dots{%
\leavevmode
\setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
\ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
\dimen0 = \wd0
\else
\dimen0 = 1.5em
\fi
\hbox to \dimen0{%
\hskip 0pt plus.25fil
.\hskip 0pt plus1fil
.\hskip 0pt plus1fil
.\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
}%
}
% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
%
\def\enddots{%
\dots
\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
}
% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
%
% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
%
\def\point{$\star$}
\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}}
\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
% The @error{} command.
% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
%
\newbox\errorbox
%
{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt}
%
\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
\hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
\advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
\vbox{%
\hrule height\dimen2
\hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
\vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
\kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
\hrule height\dimen2}
\hfil}
%
\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
%
\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
%
% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
% font height.
%
% feymr - regular
% feymo - slanted
% feybr - bold
% feybo - bold slanted
%
% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
% Hmm.
%
% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
% Hope not.
%
%
\def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
\def\eurofont{%
% We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
% \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
% installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
% font installed.
%
% There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
% that to the current nominal size.
%
% By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
% does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
%
\def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
%
\ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
% bold:
\font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
\else
% regular:
\font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
\fi
\thiseurofont
}
% Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because
% sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect
% the redefinition.
%
% Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters.
\def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth
\def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth
\def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn
\def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn
%
\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}}
\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft}
\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}}
\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright}
\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}}
\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}}
\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}}
\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}}
%
% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but
% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the
% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer
% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc.
%
% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using
% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in
% the same EC font.
\def\ogonek#1{{%
\def\temp{#1}%
\ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek
\else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek
\else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek
\else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek
\else
\ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
\ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1%
\else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}%
\fi
\fi\fi\fi\fi
}%
}
\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A}
\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a}
\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E}
\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e}
%
% Use the ec* fonts (cm-super in outline format) for non-CM glyphs.
\def\ecfont{%
% We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this
% is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
% quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
% hopefully nobody will notice/care.
\edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}%
\edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
\ifmonospace
% typewriter:
\font\thisecfont = ectt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
\else
\ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
% bold:
\font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
\else
% regular:
\font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
\fi
\fi
\thisecfont
}
% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really
% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
%
\def\registeredsymbol{%
$^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
\hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
}$%
}
% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
%
\def\textdegree{$^\circ$}
% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38
% so we'll define it if necessary.
%
\ifx\Orb\thisisundefined
\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
\fi
% Quotes.
\chardef\quotedblleft="5C
\chardef\quotedblright=`\"
\chardef\quoteleft=`\`
\chardef\quoteright=`\'
\message{page headings,}
\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
\newif\ifseenauthor
\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
%
\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
\let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
\let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{%
\begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
\endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
\envdef\titlepage{%
% Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
\begingroup
\parindent=0pt \textfonts
% Leave some space at the very top of the page.
\vglue\titlepagetopglue
% No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
\finishedtitlepagetrue
%
% Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
% at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
\let\oldpage = \page
\def\page{%
\iffinishedtitlepage\else
\finishtitlepage
\fi
\let\page = \oldpage
\page
\null
}%
}
\def\Etitlepage{%
\iffinishedtitlepage\else
\finishtitlepage
\fi
% It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
% because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
% If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
% after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
\oldpage
\endgroup
%
% Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
% in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
\HEADINGSon
%
% If they want short, they certainly want long too.
\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
\shortcontents
\contents
\global\let\shortcontents = \relax
\global\let\contents = \relax
\fi
%
\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
\contents
\global\let\contents = \relax
\global\let\shortcontents = \relax
\fi
}
\def\finishtitlepage{%
\vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
\vskip\titlepagebottomglue
\finishedtitlepagetrue
}
% Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation,
% don't worry much about spacing, ragged right. This should be used
% inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. Because
% it is always used for titles, nothing else, we call \rmisbold. \par
% should be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group.
%
\def\raggedtitlesettings{%
\rmisbold
\hyphenpenalty=10000
\parindent=0pt
\tolerance=5000
\ptexraggedright
}
% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
\parseargdef\title{%
\checkenv\titlepage
\vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
% print a rule at the page bottom also.
\finishedtitlepagefalse
\vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
}
\parseargdef\subtitle{%
\checkenv\titlepage
{\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
}
% @author should come last, but may come many times.
% It can also be used inside @quotation.
%
\parseargdef\author{%
\def\temp{\quotation}%
\ifx\thisenv\temp
\def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
\else
\checkenv\titlepage
\ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
{\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}%
\fi
}
% Set up page headings and footings.
\let\thispage=\folio
\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
% Now make TeX use those variables
\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
\else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
\else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
% Commands to set those variables.
% For example, this is what @headings on does
% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
% @evenfooting @thisfile||
% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
\global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
%
% Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
% @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
\global\advance\pageheight by -12pt
\global\advance\vsize by -12pt
}
\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page
% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page
%
% The same set of arguments for:
%
% @oddheadingmarks
% @evenfootingmarks
% @oddfootingmarks
% @everyheadingmarks
% @everyfootingmarks
\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}}
\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}}
\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}}
\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}}
\def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1}
\headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} }
\def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1}
\headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} }
% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom.
\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {%
\expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname
\global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp
}
\everyheadingmarks bottom
\everyfootingmarks bottom
% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
% @headings off turns them off.
% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
\def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination
\evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}%
\oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}%
}
\def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting
\HEADINGSoff % it's the default
% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
% edge of all pages.
\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
\global\pageno=1
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
}
\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
% page number on top right.
\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
\global\pageno=1
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
}
\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
}
\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
}
% Subroutines used in generating headings
% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
\ifx\today\thisisundefined
\def\today{%
\number\day\space
\ifcase\month
\or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
\or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
\or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
\fi
\space\number\year}
\fi
% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
% It generates no output of its own.
\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
\message{tables,}
% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
% default indentation of table text
\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
\newdimen\itemmax
% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
% these defs.
% They also define \itemindex
% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
\advance\hsize by -\tableindent
\setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
\itemindex{#1}%
\nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
%
% If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
% by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
% line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
% command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
% horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
\ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
%
% Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
% but leave it ragged-right.
\begingroup
\advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
\advance\hsize by\tableindent
\advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax
\leavevmode\unhbox0\par
\endgroup
%
% We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
% \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
\nobreak \vskip-\parskip
%
% Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if
% what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
% \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
% cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this
% bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
% \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also.
%
\penalty 10001
\endgroup
\itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
\else
% The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
% following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
\noindent
% Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
% the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
% eventually be printed.
\nobreak\kern-\tableindent
\dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
\unhbox0
\nobreak\kern\dimen0
\endgroup
\itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
\fi
}
\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
\envdef\table{%
\let\itemindex\gobble
\tablecheck{table}%
}
\envdef\ftable{%
\def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
\tablecheck{ftable}%
}
\envdef\vtable{%
\def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
\tablecheck{vtable}%
}
\def\tablecheck#1{%
\ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
\endgroup
\errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
\def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
\else
\let\next\tablex
\fi
\next
}
\def\tablex#1{%
\def\itemindicate{#1}%
\parsearg\tabley
}
\def\tabley#1{%
{%
\makevalueexpandable
\edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
\expandafter
}\temp \endtablez
}
\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
\aboveenvbreak
\ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
\ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
\itemmax=\tableindent
\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
\advance \leftskip by \tableindent
\exdentamount=\tableindent
\parindent = 0pt
\parskip = \smallskipamount
\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
\let\item = \internalBitem
\let\itemx = \internalBitemx
}
\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
\let\Eftable\Etable
\let\Evtable\Etable
\let\Eitemize\Etable
\let\Eenumerate\Etable
% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
\newcount \itemno
\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
\def\doitemize#1{%
\aboveenvbreak
\itemmax=\itemindent
\advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
\exdentamount=\itemindent
\parindent=0pt
\parskip=\smallskipamount
\ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
%
% Try typesetting the item mark that if the document erroneously says
% something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error
% right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the
% world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if
% the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w.
\def\itemcontents{#1}%
\setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}%
%
% @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
\ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
%
\let\item=\itemizeitem
}
% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
%
\def\itemizeitem{%
\advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations
{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
{%
% If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
% \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
% done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero
% parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the
% other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
% usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
% space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least
% that's the theory.
\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
\noindent
\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
%
\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
\flushcr
}
% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
%
\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
% argument is the same as `1'.
%
\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
% If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
\def\thearg{#1}%
\ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
%
% Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
% letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
% (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
% This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
% all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
\expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
\ifx\rest\empty
% Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
% A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
% An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
% not equal to itself.
% Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
%
% We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
% continuing to look for a .
%
\ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
\numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
\else
% It's a letter.
\ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
\lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
\else
\uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
\fi
\fi
\else
% Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
\numericenumerate
\fi
}
% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
% given in \thearg.
%
\def\numericenumerate{%
\itemno = \thearg
\startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
}
% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
\itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
\startenumeration{%
% Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
\ifnum\itemno=0
\errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
alphabet}%
\fi
\char\lccode\itemno
}%
}
% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
\itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
\startenumeration{%
% Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
\ifnum\itemno=0
\errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
alphabet}
\fi
\char\uccode\itemno
}%
}
% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
%
\def\startenumeration#1{%
\advance\itemno by -1
\doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
}
% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
% to @enumerate.
%
\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
% @multitable macros
% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
%
% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
% To make preamble:
%
% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
% @item ...
%
% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
% columns as desired.
% Or use a template:
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
% @item ...
% using the widest term desired in each column.
% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
% if they are.
% Sample multitable:
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
% @item
% first col stuff
% @tab
% second col stuff
% @tab
% third col
% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
%
% They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
% @end multitable
% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
% to baseline.
% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
%
\newskip\multitableparskip
\newskip\multitableparindent
\newdimen\multitablecolspace
\newskip\multitablelinespace
\multitableparskip=0pt
\multitableparindent=6pt
\multitablecolspace=12pt
\multitablelinespace=0pt
% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
%
\let\endsetuptable\relax
\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
\let\columnfractions\relax
\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
\newif\ifsetpercent
% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is.
%
\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
\global\advance\colcount by 1
\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
\setuptable
}
\newcount\colcount
\def\setuptable#1{%
\def\firstarg{#1}%
\ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
\let\go = \relax
\else
\ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
\global\setpercenttrue
\else
\ifsetpercent
\let\go\pickupwholefraction
\else
\global\advance\colcount by 1
\setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
% separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
\fi
\fi
\ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
% Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
% we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
\def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
\else
\let\go = \setuptable
\fi%
\fi
\go
}
% multitable-only commands.
%
% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
% of an alignment entry. \everycr resets \everytab so we don't have to
% undo it ourselves.
\def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable
\def\headitem{%
\checkenv\multitable
\crcr
\global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs
\the\everytab % for the first item
}%
%
% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template
% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until
% we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve.
% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
%
\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab.
%
\envdef\multitable{%
\vskip\parskip
\startsavinginserts
%
% @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
% We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
% contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
% \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
\def\item{\crcr}%
%
\tolerance=9500
\hbadness=9500
\setmultitablespacing
\parskip=\multitableparskip
\parindent=\multitableparindent
\overfullrule=0pt
\global\colcount=0
%
\everycr = {%
\noalign{%
\global\everytab={}%
\global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
% Check for saved footnotes, etc.
\checkinserts
% Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
%\filbreak
% Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
% table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the
% problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
}%
}%
%
\parsearg\domultitable
}
\def\domultitable#1{%
% To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
\setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
%
% This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
% be used as many times as user calls for columns.
% \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
% continue for many paragraphs if desired.
\halign\bgroup &%
\global\advance\colcount by 1
\multistrut
\vtop{%
% Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
%
% In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
% we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
% the first one.
%
% If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
% to the width of each template entry.
%
% If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
% use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
% will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
% left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
%
% Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
\rightskip=0pt
\ifnum\colcount=1
% The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
\advance\hsize by\leftskip
\else
\ifsetpercent \else
% If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
% we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
\advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
\fi
% In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
\leftskip=\multitablecolspace
\fi
% Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
% blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
% box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
% For example:
% @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
% @item @code{#}
% @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
% Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
% marking characters.
\noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
}\cr
}
\def\Emultitable{%
\crcr
\egroup % end the \halign
\global\setpercentfalse
}
\def\setmultitablespacing{%
\def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
%
% Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
% \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on
% this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
% See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
\fi
% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
% table. If not, do nothing.
% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
% than skip between lines in the table.
\fi%
\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
% than skip between lines in the table.
\fi}
\message{conditionals,}
% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't
% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we
% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
% attempt to close an environment group.
%
\def\makecond#1{%
\expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
\expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
}
\makecond{iftex}
\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
\makecond{ifnothtml}
\makecond{ifnotinfo}
\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
\makecond{ifnotxml}
% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
%
\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
\def\html{\doignore{html}}
\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
%
% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
\newcount\doignorecount
\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
% Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
\obeylines
\catcode`\@ = \other
\catcode`\{ = \other
\catcode`\} = \other
%
% Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
\spaceisspace
%
% Count number of #1's that we've seen.
\doignorecount = 0
%
% Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
\dodoignore{#1}%
}
{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
\obeylines %
%
\gdef\dodoignore#1{%
% #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
%
% Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
\long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
%
% And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
% line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
% example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
\long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
%
% And now expand that command.
\doignoretext ^^M%
}%
}
\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
\def\temp{#1}%
\ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found.
\let\next\doignoretextzzz
\else % Found a nested condition, ...
\advance\doignorecount by 1
\let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another.
% If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
\fi
\next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
}
% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
%
\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
\ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end.
\let\next\enddoignore
\else % Still inside a nested condition.
\advance\doignorecount by -1
\let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end.
\fi
\next
}
% Finish off ignored text.
{ \obeylines%
% Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
% environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
% would result in a blank line in the output.
\gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
}
% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
%
% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
% didn't need it.
% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
%
\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
{%
\makevalueexpandable
\def\temp{#2}%
\edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
\ifx\temp\empty
\next{}%
\else
\setzzz#2\endsetzzz
\fi
}%
}
% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
%
\parseargdef\clear{%
{%
\makevalueexpandable
\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
}%
}
% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
{
\catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
%
\gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
\let\value = \expandablevalue
% We don't want these characters active, ...
\catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
% ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
% we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
% So \let them to their normal equivalents.
\let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore
}
}
% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
% the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the
% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
%
\def\expandablevalue#1{%
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
{[No value for ``#1'']}%
\message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
\else
\csname SET#1\endcsname
\fi
}
% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
% with @set.
%
% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
%
\makecond{ifset}
\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
\def\doifset#1#2{%
{%
\makevalueexpandable
\let\next=\empty
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
#1% If not set, redefine \next.
\fi
\expandafter
}\next
}
\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
% @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been
% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
%
% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
%
\makecond{ifclear}
\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
% @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written
% without the @) is in fact defined. We can only feasibly check at the
% TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered
% defined even though it is not a Texinfo command.
%
\makecond{ifcommanddefined}
\def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}}
%
\def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{%
\makevalueexpandable
\let\next=\empty
\expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax
#1% If not defined, \let\next as above.
\fi
\expandafter
}\next
}
\def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}}
% @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above.
\makecond{ifcommandnotdefined}
\def\ifcommandnotdefined{%
\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}}
\def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}}
% Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to
% test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available.
\set txicommandconditionals
% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
\let\dircategory=\comment
% @defininfoenclose.
\let\definfoenclose=\comment
\message{indexing,}
% Index generation facilities
% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
% for the sake of vms.
%
\def\newindex#1{%
\iflinks
\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
\fi
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
\noexpand\doindex{#1}}
}
% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
%
\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
%
\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
%
\def\newcodeindex#1{%
\iflinks
\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
\fi
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
\noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
}
% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
%
% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
% inside @code.
%
\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
% #3 the target index (bar).
\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
% Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
% closing the target index.
\expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax
% The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
% Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
\expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
\expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
\fi
% redefine \fooindfile:
\expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
\expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
% redefine \fooindex:
\expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
}
% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
% and it is "foo", the name of the index.
% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
%
\def\indexdummies{%
\escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
\def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
\def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
%
% Need these unexpandable (because we define \tt as a dummy)
% definitions when @{ or @} appear in index entry text. Also, more
% complicated, when \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
% We can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
% braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. Perhaps we
% should define @lbrace and @rbrace commands a la @comma.
\def\{{{\tt\char123}}%
\def\}{{\tt\char125}}%
%
% I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is
% generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts
% causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is,
% apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput
% is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput
% disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that
% processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it
% seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that
% is still getting written without apparent harm.
%
% Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to
% help-texinfo, 22may06):
% @macro funindex {WORD}
% @findex xyz
% @end macro
% ...
% @funindex commtest
%
% The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor.
%
% Sample whatsit resulting:
% .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}}
%
% So:
\let\endinput = \empty
%
% Do the redefinitions.
\commondummies
}
% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to
% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
% \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @,
% this will be simpler.
%
\def\atdummies{%
\def\@{@@}%
\def\ {@ }%
\let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
\let\} = \rbraceatcmd
%
% Do the redefinitions.
\commondummies
\otherbackslash
}
% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.
%
\def\commondummies{%
%
% \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
% preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words,
% not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
% control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
% from whatever follows.
%
% For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
% space.
%
% These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
% those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
% that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
%
\def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}%
\def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}%
\let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
%
\commondummiesnofonts
%
\definedummyletter\_%
\definedummyletter\-%
%
% Non-English letters.
\definedummyword\AA
\definedummyword\AE
\definedummyword\DH
\definedummyword\L
\definedummyword\O
\definedummyword\OE
\definedummyword\TH
\definedummyword\aa
\definedummyword\ae
\definedummyword\dh
\definedummyword\exclamdown
\definedummyword\l
\definedummyword\o
\definedummyword\oe
\definedummyword\ordf
\definedummyword\ordm
\definedummyword\questiondown
\definedummyword\ss
\definedummyword\th
%
% Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
\definedummyword\bf
\definedummyword\gtr
\definedummyword\hat
\definedummyword\less
\definedummyword\sf
\definedummyword\sl
\definedummyword\tclose
\definedummyword\tt
%
\definedummyword\LaTeX
\definedummyword\TeX
%
% Assorted special characters.
\definedummyword\arrow
\definedummyword\bullet
\definedummyword\comma
\definedummyword\copyright
\definedummyword\registeredsymbol
\definedummyword\dots
\definedummyword\enddots
\definedummyword\entrybreak
\definedummyword\equiv
\definedummyword\error
\definedummyword\euro
\definedummyword\expansion
\definedummyword\geq
\definedummyword\guillemetleft
\definedummyword\guillemetright
\definedummyword\guilsinglleft
\definedummyword\guilsinglright
\definedummyword\lbracechar
\definedummyword\leq
\definedummyword\minus
\definedummyword\ogonek
\definedummyword\pounds
\definedummyword\point
\definedummyword\print
\definedummyword\quotedblbase
\definedummyword\quotedblleft
\definedummyword\quotedblright
\definedummyword\quoteleft
\definedummyword\quoteright
\definedummyword\quotesinglbase
\definedummyword\rbracechar
\definedummyword\result
\definedummyword\textdegree
%
% We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
\macrolist
%
\normalturnoffactive
%
% Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
% (non-fully-expandable) commands.
\makevalueexpandable
}
% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
%
\def\commondummiesnofonts{%
% Control letters and accents.
\definedummyletter\!%
\definedummyaccent\"%
\definedummyaccent\'%
\definedummyletter\*%
\definedummyaccent\,%
\definedummyletter\.%
\definedummyletter\/%
\definedummyletter\:%
\definedummyaccent\=%
\definedummyletter\?%
\definedummyaccent\^%
\definedummyaccent\`%
\definedummyaccent\~%
\definedummyword\u
\definedummyword\v
\definedummyword\H
\definedummyword\dotaccent
\definedummyword\ogonek
\definedummyword\ringaccent
\definedummyword\tieaccent
\definedummyword\ubaraccent
\definedummyword\udotaccent
\definedummyword\dotless
%
% Texinfo font commands.
\definedummyword\b
\definedummyword\i
\definedummyword\r
\definedummyword\sansserif
\definedummyword\sc
\definedummyword\slanted
\definedummyword\t
%
% Commands that take arguments.
\definedummyword\abbr
\definedummyword\acronym
\definedummyword\anchor
\definedummyword\cite
\definedummyword\code
\definedummyword\command
\definedummyword\dfn
\definedummyword\dmn
\definedummyword\email
\definedummyword\emph
\definedummyword\env
\definedummyword\file
\definedummyword\image
\definedummyword\indicateurl
\definedummyword\inforef
\definedummyword\kbd
\definedummyword\key
\definedummyword\math
\definedummyword\option
\definedummyword\pxref
\definedummyword\ref
\definedummyword\samp
\definedummyword\strong
\definedummyword\tie
\definedummyword\uref
\definedummyword\url
\definedummyword\var
\definedummyword\verb
\definedummyword\w
\definedummyword\xref
}
% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
%
\def\indexnofonts{%
% Accent commands should become @asis.
\def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
% We can just ignore other control letters.
\def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
% All control words become @asis by default; overrides below.
\let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
%
\commondummiesnofonts
%
% Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
% and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
% Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
%\let\tt=\asis
%
\def\ { }%
\def\@{@}%
\def\_{\normalunderscore}%
\def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting
%
% Unfortunately, texindex is not prepared to handle braces in the
% content at all. So for index sorting, we map @{ and @} to strings
% starting with |, since that ASCII character is between ASCII { and }.
\def\{{|a}%
\def\lbracechar{|a}%
%
\def\}{|b}%
\def\rbracechar{|b}%
%
% Non-English letters.
\def\AA{AA}%
\def\AE{AE}%
\def\DH{DZZ}%
\def\L{L}%
\def\OE{OE}%
\def\O{O}%
\def\TH{ZZZ}%
\def\aa{aa}%
\def\ae{ae}%
\def\dh{dzz}%
\def\exclamdown{!}%
\def\l{l}%
\def\oe{oe}%
\def\ordf{a}%
\def\ordm{o}%
\def\o{o}%
\def\questiondown{?}%
\def\ss{ss}%
\def\th{zzz}%
%
\def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
\def\TeX{TeX}%
%
% Assorted special characters.
% (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
\def\arrow{->}%
\def\bullet{bullet}%
\def\comma{,}%
\def\copyright{copyright}%
\def\dots{...}%
\def\enddots{...}%
\def\equiv{==}%
\def\error{error}%
\def\euro{euro}%
\def\expansion{==>}%
\def\geq{>=}%
\def\guillemetleft{<<}%
\def\guillemetright{>>}%
\def\guilsinglleft{<}%
\def\guilsinglright{>}%
\def\leq{<=}%
\def\minus{-}%
\def\point{.}%
\def\pounds{pounds}%
\def\print{-|}%
\def\quotedblbase{"}%
\def\quotedblleft{"}%
\def\quotedblright{"}%
\def\quoteleft{`}%
\def\quoteright{'}%
\def\quotesinglbase{,}%
\def\registeredsymbol{R}%
\def\result{=>}%
\def\textdegree{o}%
%
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax
\else \indexlquoteignore \fi
%
% We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
% Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
% makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
% writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
% that starts with \.
%
% Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
% to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that
% goes to end-of-line is not handled.
%
\macrolist
}
% Undocumented (for FSFS 2nd ed.): @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us
% ignore left quotes in the sort term.
{\catcode`\`=\active
\gdef\indexlquoteignore{\let`=\empty}}
\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
% is with most defuns, which call us directly).
%
\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
\iflinks
{%
% Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
\toks0 = {#2}%
% If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
\def\thirdarg{#3}%
\ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
\toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
\fi
%
\edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
%
\safewhatsit\dosubindwrite
}%
\fi
}
% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
%
\def\dosubindwrite{%
% Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
\ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
\insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
\fi
%
% Remember, we are within a group.
\indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
\def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
% so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
%
% Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
% get the string to sort by.
{\indexnofonts
\edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
\xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
}%
%
% Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
% the original text, including any font commands. We write
% three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
% subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
% sorted result.
\edef\temp{%
\write\writeto{%
\string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
}%
\temp
}
% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
%
% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that
% sequences like this:
% @end defun
% @tindex whatever
% @defun ...
% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
% the previous defun.
%
% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
%
% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
%
% But wait, there is a catch there:
% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not
% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual
% representation of the skip.
%
% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
%
\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
%
\newskip\whatsitskip
\newcount\whatsitpenalty
%
% ..., ready, GO:
%
\def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode
#1%
\else
% \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
\whatsitskip = \lastskip
\edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
\whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty
%
% If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
% skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this
% -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a
% non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
% breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
\ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
\else
\vskip-\whatsitskip
\fi
%
#1%
%
\ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
% If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
% perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want
% to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
% signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
% following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example:
% @deffn deffn-whatever
% @vindex index-whatever
% Description.
% would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
% and the "Description." paragraph.
\ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
\else
% On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
% this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
% (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
\nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
\fi
\fi}
% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
% or
% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
% containing these kinds of lines:
% \initial {c}
% before the first topic whose initial is c
% \entry {topic}{pagelist}
% for a topic that is used without subtopics
% \primary {topic}
% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
% for each subtopic.
% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
\def\findex {\fnindex}
\def\kindex {\kyindex}
\def\cindex {\cpindex}
\def\vindex {\vrindex}
\def\tindex {\tpindex}
\def\pindex {\pgindex}
\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
{\obeylines %
\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
%
\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
\dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
%
\smallfonts \rm
\tolerance = 9500
\plainfrenchspacing
\everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
%
% See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
% Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
% \initial {@}
% as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
% (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
\catcode`\@ = 11
\openin 1 \jobname.#1s
\ifeof 1
% \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
% and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
% index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
% there is some text.
\putwordIndexNonexistent
\else
%
% If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
% false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
% it can discover if there is anything in it.
\read 1 to \temp
\ifeof 1
\putwordIndexIsEmpty
\else
% Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
% character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
% to make right now.
\def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
\catcode`\\ = 0
\escapechar = `\\
\begindoublecolumns
\input \jobname.#1s
\enddoublecolumns
\fi
\fi
\closein 1
\endgroup}
% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
\def\initial#1{{%
% Some minor font changes for the special characters.
\let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
%
% Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
\removelastskip
%
% We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
\nobreak
\vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
\penalty 0
\vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
%
% Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
% baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
% to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
% we need before each entry, but it's better.
%
% No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
\vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
\leftline{\secbf #1}%
% Do our best not to break after the initial.
\nobreak
\vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
}}
% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index
% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
%
% A straightforward implementation would start like this:
% \def\entry#1#2{...
% But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
% @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge---
% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
% --kasal, 21nov03
\def\entry{%
\begingroup
%
% Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
% affect previous text.
\par
%
% Do not fill out the last line with white space.
\parfillskip = 0in
%
% No extra space above this paragraph.
\parskip = 0in
%
% Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
\finalhyphendemerits = 0
%
% \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
% don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
% dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
% indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
% lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
%
% \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
% of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
\hangindent = 2em
%
% When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
% with blank space.
\rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
%
% A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
% columns.
\vskip 0pt plus1pt
%
% When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks
% from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section
% titles, for instance.
\def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
\def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}%
%
% Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
\afterassignment\doentry
\let\temp =
}
\def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
\def\doentry{%
\bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
\noindent
\aftergroup\finishentry
% And now comes the text of the entry.
}
\def\finishentry#1{%
% #1 is the page number.
%
% The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
% there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
% cursed by a Unix daemon.
\setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}%
\ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt
\ %
\else
%
% If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
% this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
% fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
\hfil\penalty50
\null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
%
% The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
% part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
% \hbox ensues.
\ifpdf
\pdfgettoks#1.%
\ \the\toksA
\else
\ #1%
\fi
\fi
\par
\endgroup
}
% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em.
\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
\hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
\def\secondary#1#2{{%
\parfillskip=0in
\parskip=0in
\hangindent=1in
\hangafter=1
\noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
\ifpdf
\pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
\else
#2
\fi
\par
}}
% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
\catcode`\@=11
\newbox\partialpage
\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
% Grab any single-column material above us.
\output = {%
%
% Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
% whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
% routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
% essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
% that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
% output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
% runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case.
\ifvoid\partialpage \else
\onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
\fi
%
\global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
% Unvbox the main output page.
\unvbox\PAGE
\kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
}%
}%
\eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
%
% Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
\output = {\doublecolumnout}%
%
% Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
% routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
% format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
% of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
% execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
%
% First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
% the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
% changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
% below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
% as it did when we hard-coded it.
%
% We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
% can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
% been clobbered.
%
\doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
\advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
\divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
\hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
%
% Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
% since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
\vsize = 2\vsize
}
% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
% the last.
%
\def\doublecolumnout{%
\splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
% Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
% (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
% previous page.
\dimen@ = \vsize
\divide\dimen@ by 2
\advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
%
% box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
\setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
\onepageout\pagesofar
\unvbox255
\penalty\outputpenalty
}
%
% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
\def\pagesofar{%
\unvbox\partialpage
%
\hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
\wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
\hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
}
%
% All done with double columns.
\def\enddoublecolumns{%
% The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
% _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the
% following situation:
%
% The last section of the index consists only of a single entry.
% Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no
% break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last
% section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not
% fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following
% penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject
% below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output
% routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last
% double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which
% is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with
% the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as
% the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page
% break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the
% page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page
% goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final
% section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after
% \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns
% and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see
% \pagebody), causing an overfull box.
%
% Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the
% page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281).
\penalty0
%
\output = {%
% Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the
% current page, no automatic page break.
\balancecolumns
%
% If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
% though, there will be another page break right after this \output
% invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
% want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
% definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
% called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
% the output somewhat more palatable.)
\global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
}%
\eject
\endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
%
% \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
% the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
% typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
% \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
\pagegoal = \vsize
}
%
% Called at the end of the double column material.
\def\balancecolumns{%
\setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
\dimen@ = \ht0
\advance\dimen@ by \topskip
\advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
\divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
%debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
\splittopskip = \topskip
% Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
{%
\vbadness = 10000
\loop
\global\setbox3 = \copy0
\global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
\ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
\global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
\repeat
}%
%debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
\setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
\setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
%
\pagesofar
}
\catcode`\@ = \other
\message{sectioning,}
% Chapters, sections, etc.
% Let's start with @part.
\outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}}
\def\partzzz#1{%
\chapoddpage
\null
\vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit
\begingroup
\noindent \titlefonts\rmisbold #1\par % the text
\let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with
\writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc
\headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page
\chapoddpage
\endgroup
}
% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered
% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter
% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000
% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
\newcount\chapno
\newcount\secno \secno=0
\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
%
% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
%
\def\appendixletter{%
\ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
% The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
% expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
% expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
% with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
\else\char\the\appendixno
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number
% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use
% these. @section does likewise.
\def\thischapter{}
\def\thischapternum{}
\def\thischaptername{}
\def\thissection{}
\def\thissectionnum{}
\def\thissectionname{}
\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
% we only have subsub.
\chardef\maxseclevel = 3
%
% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
% To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
\chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel
%
% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
\def\chapheadtype{N}
% Choose a heading macro
% #1 is heading type
% #2 is heading level
% #3 is text for heading
\def\genhead#1#2#3{%
% Compute the abs. sec. level:
\absseclevel=#2
\advance\absseclevel by \secbase
% Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
\ifnum \absseclevel < 0
\absseclevel = 0
\else
\ifnum \absseclevel > 3
\absseclevel = 3
\fi
\fi
% The heading type:
\def\headtype{#1}%
\if \headtype U%
\ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel
\chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel
\fi
\else
% Check for appendix sections:
\ifnum \absseclevel = 0
\edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
\else
\if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
\errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
\fi\fi
\fi
% Check for numbered within unnumbered:
\ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel
\def\headtype{U}%
\else
\chardef\unnlevel = 3
\fi
\fi
% Now print the heading:
\if \headtype U%
\ifcase\absseclevel
\unnumberedzzz{#3}%
\or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
\or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
\or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
\fi
\else
\if \headtype A%
\ifcase\absseclevel
\appendixzzz{#3}%
\or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
\or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
\or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
\fi
\else
\ifcase\absseclevel
\chapterzzz{#3}%
\or \seczzz{#3}%
\or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
\or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
\fi
\fi
\fi
\suppressfirstparagraphindent
}
% an interface:
\def\numhead{\genhead N}
\def\apphead{\genhead A}
\def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset
% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
%
% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
%
\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
\def\chapterzzz#1{%
% section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
% as an @include file.
\global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
\global\advance\chapno by 1
%
% Used for \float.
\gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
\resetallfloatnos
%
% \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations.
\toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}%
\message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}%
%
% Write the actual heading.
\chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
%
% So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
\global\let\section = \numberedsec
\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
}
\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz
%
\def\appendixzzz#1{%
\global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
\global\advance\appendixno by 1
\gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
\resetallfloatnos
%
% \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations.
\toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}%
\message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}%
%
\chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
%
\global\let\section = \appendixsec
\global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
\global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
}
% normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz:
\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}}
\def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
\global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
\global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
%
% Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
\global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
\resetallfloatnos
%
% This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
% argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
% expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
% expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
% to be executed, not expanded).
%
% Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
% as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
% \the to achieve this: TeX expands \the only once,
% simply yielding the contents of . (We also do this for
% the toc entries.)
\toks0 = {#1}%
\message{(\the\toks0)}%
%
\chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
%
\global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
\global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
\global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
}
% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
% Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
% an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
% Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04
\let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
\unnmhead0{#1}%
\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
}
% @top is like @unnumbered.
\let\top\unnumbered
% Sections.
%
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
\def\seczzz#1{%
\global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
}
% normally calls appendixsectionzzz:
\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}}
\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
\global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
}
\let\appendixsec\appendixsection
% normally calls unnumberedseczzz:
\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}}
\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
\global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
}
% Subsections.
%
% normally calls numberedsubseczzz:
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}}
\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
\global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
}
% normally calls appendixsubseczzz:
\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}}
\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
\global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
{\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
}
% normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz:
\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}}
\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
\global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
}
% Subsubsections.
%
% normally numberedsubsubseczzz:
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}}
\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
\global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
}
% normally appendixsubsubseczzz:
\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}}
\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
\global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
{\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
}
% normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz:
\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}}
\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
\global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
}
% These macros control what the section commands do, according
% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
\let\section = \numberedsec
\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
\def\majorheading{%
{\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
\parsearg\chapheadingzzz
}
\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
\def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
\vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
\nobreak\bigskip \nobreak
\suppressfirstparagraphindent
}
% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
\suppressfirstparagraphindent}
\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
\suppressfirstparagraphindent}
\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
\suppressfirstparagraphindent}
% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
\newskip\chapheadingskip
% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it.
\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will
% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't
% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page.
\def\chapoddpage{%
\chappager
\ifodd\pageno \else
\begingroup
\headingsoff
\null
\chappager
\endgroup
\fi
}
\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
\def\CHAPPAGon{%
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
\def\CHAPPAGodd{%
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
\CHAPPAGon
% Chapter opening.
%
% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
%
% To test against our argument.
\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
%
\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
% Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
\let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
\let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
\gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
\gdef\thissection{}}%
%
\def\temptype{#2}%
\ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
\gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
\gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}%
\else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
\gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
\gdef\thischapter{}}%
\else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
\toks0={#1}%
\xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
\gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
\gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}%
% \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible
% commands in some of the translations.
\gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{}
\noexpand\thischapternum:
\noexpand\thischaptername}%
}%
\else
\toks0={#1}%
\xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
\gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
\gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}%
% \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible
% commands in some of the translations.
\gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{}
\noexpand\thischapternum:
\noexpand\thischaptername}%
}%
\fi\fi\fi
%
% Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
% the preceding space.
\safewhatsit\domark
%
% Insert the chapter heading break.
\pchapsepmacro
%
% Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
% between here and the heading.
\let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
\let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
\domark
%
{%
\chapfonts \rmisbold
%
% Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the
% xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called
% after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
\gdef\lastsection{#1}%
%
% Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
% number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
\ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
\setbox0 = \hbox{}%
\def\toctype{unnchap}%
\else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
\setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
\def\toctype{omit}%
\else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
\setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
\def\toctype{app}%
\else
\setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
\def\toctype{numchap}%
\fi\fi\fi
%
% Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the
% \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
% entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
\writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
%
% For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
% the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
% been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
% text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
% being visible, for instance under high magnification.
\donoderef{#2}%
%
% Typeset the actual heading.
\nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue.
\vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
\unhbox0 #1\par}%
}%
\nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
\nobreak
}
% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
\def\centerparameters{%
\advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
\leftskip = \rightskip
\parfillskip = 0pt
}
% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
% updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03.
%
\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
%
\def\unnchfopen #1{%
\chapoddpage
\vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
\nobreak\bigskip\nobreak
}
\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
\par\penalty 5000 %
}
\def\centerchfopen #1{%
\chapoddpage
\vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings \hfill #1\hfill}%
\nobreak\bigskip \nobreak
}
\def\CHAPFopen{%
\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and
% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
%
\newskip\secheadingskip
\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
% Subsection titles.
\newskip\subsecheadingskip
\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
% Subsubsection titles.
\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
% Print any size, any type, section title.
%
% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
% section number.
%
\def\seckeyword{sec}
%
\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
{%
\checkenv{}% should not be in an environment.
%
% Switch to the right set of fonts.
\csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold
%
\def\sectionlevel{#2}%
\def\temptype{#3}%
%
% Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
\let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
\ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
\ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
\gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
\gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}%
\fi
\else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
% Don't redefine \thissection.
\else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
\ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
\toks0={#1}%
\xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
\gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
\gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
% \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
% commands in some of the translations.
\gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
\noexpand\thissectionnum:
\noexpand\thissectionname}%
}%
\fi
\else
\ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
\toks0={#1}%
\xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
\gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
\gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
% \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
% commands in some of the translations.
\gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
\noexpand\thissectionnum:
\noexpand\thissectionname}%
}%
\fi
\fi\fi\fi
%
% Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we
% don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph
% if the document didn't happen to have a blank line.
\par
%
% Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
% the preceding space.
\safewhatsit\domark
%
% Insert space above the heading.
\csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
%
% Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
% between here and the heading.
\let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
\domark
%
% Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
\ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
\setbox0 = \hbox{}%
\def\toctype{unn}%
\gdef\lastsection{#1}%
\else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
% for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
% and don't redefine \lastsection.
\setbox0 = \hbox{}%
\def\toctype{omit}%
\let\sectionlevel=\empty
\else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
\setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
\def\toctype{app}%
\gdef\lastsection{#1}%
\else
\setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
\def\toctype{num}%
\gdef\lastsection{#1}%
\fi\fi\fi
%
% Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro.
\writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
%
% Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
% Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
\donoderef{#3}%
%
% Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
% That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
% preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
% \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that
% break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
% section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000.
\nobreak
%
% Output the actual section heading.
\vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright
\hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number
\unhbox0 #1}%
}%
% Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
% Don't allow stretch, though.
\kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
%
% Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
% was followed by glue.
\nobreak
%
% We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
% glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
% discardable item.) However, when a paragraph is not started next
% (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out
% or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically
% obscuring the section heading with something else.
\vskip-\parskip
%
% This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known
% \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation
% and do the needful.
\penalty 10001
}
\message{toc,}
% Table of contents.
\newwrite\tocfile
% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
% Called from @chapter, etc.
%
% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
% destination to jump to.
%
% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the
% table of contents chapter openings themselves.
%
\newif\iftocfileopened
\def\omitkeyword{omit}%
%
\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
\edef\writetoctype{#1}%
\ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
\iftocfileopened\else
\immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
\global\tocfileopenedtrue
\fi
%
\iflinks
{\atdummies
\edef\temp{%
\write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
\temp
}%
\fi
\fi
%
% Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
% writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't
% just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
% 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
% two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named
% `1', and two named `2'.
\ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
}
% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant
% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
%
\def\activecatcodes{%
\catcode`\"=\active
\catcode`\$=\active
\catcode`\<=\active
\catcode`\>=\active
\catcode`\\=\active
\catcode`\^=\active
\catcode`\_=\active
\catcode`\|=\active
\catcode`\~=\active
}
% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
\def\readtocfile{%
\setupdatafile
\activecatcodes
\input \tocreadfilename
}
\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
\newcount\savepageno
\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
%
\def\startcontents#1{%
% If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
% start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
% \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
% From: Torbjorn Granlund
\contentsalignmacro
\immediate\closeout\tocfile
%
% Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
% It is abundantly clear what they are.
\chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
%
\savepageno = \pageno
\begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
\raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
\advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
%
% Roman numerals for page numbers.
\ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
}
% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on
% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined.
%
\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc}
% Normal (long) toc.
%
\def\contents{%
\startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
\openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
\ifeof 1 \else
\readtocfile
\fi
\vfill \eject
\contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
\ifeof 1 \else
\pdfmakeoutlines
\fi
\closein 1
\endgroup
\lastnegativepageno = \pageno
\global\pageno = \savepageno
}
% And just the chapters.
\def\summarycontents{%
\startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
%
\let\partentry = \shortpartentry
\let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
\let\appentry = \shortchapentry
\let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
% We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
\secfonts
\let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
\let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
\rm
\hyphenpenalty = 10000
\advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
\def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
\let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
\let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
\let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
\let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
\let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
\let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
\let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
\let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
\openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
\ifeof 1 \else
\readtocfile
\fi
\closein 1
\vfill \eject
\contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
\endgroup
\lastnegativepageno = \pageno
\global\pageno = \savepageno
}
\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
%
\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
% This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
% widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
% But use \hss just in case.
% (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
% the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
%
% We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
% with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and
% left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
% chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
% there are before deciding ...
\hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
}
% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
% The last argument is the page number.
% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
% Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't
% exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width.
% Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed.
\def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}}
\def\partentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}}
%
% Parts, in the short toc.
\def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{%
\penalty-300
\vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip
\shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}%
}
% Chapters, in the main contents.
\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
%
% Chapters, in the short toc.
% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
\tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
}
% Appendices, in the main contents.
% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
%
\def\appendixbox#1{%
% We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
\setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
\hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
%
\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
% Unnumbered chapters.
\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
% Sections.
\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
% Subsections.
\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
% And subsubsections.
\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
% Same as \defaultparindent.
\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
% page number.
%
% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
\penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
\begingroup
\chapentryfonts
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
\endgroup
\nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
}
\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
\secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
\endgroup}
\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
\subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
\endgroup}
\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
\subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
\endgroup}
% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
\let\tocentry = \entry
% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
\message{environments,}
% @foo ... @end foo.
% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily.
% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
% But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character.
\envdef\tex{%
\setupmarkupstyle{tex}%
\catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
\catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
\catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
\catcode `\%=14
\catcode `\+=\other
\catcode `\"=\other
\catcode `\|=\other
\catcode `\<=\other
\catcode `\>=\other
\catcode`\`=\other
\catcode`\'=\other
\escapechar=`\\
%
% ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our
% other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions.
\mathactive
%
\let\b=\ptexb
\let\bullet=\ptexbullet
\let\c=\ptexc
\let\,=\ptexcomma
\let\.=\ptexdot
\let\dots=\ptexdots
\let\equiv=\ptexequiv
\let\!=\ptexexclam
\let\i=\ptexi
\let\indent=\ptexindent
\let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
\let\{=\ptexlbrace
\let\+=\tabalign
\let\}=\ptexrbrace
\let\/=\ptexslash
\let\*=\ptexstar
\let\t=\ptext
\expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % outer
\let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
%
\def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
\def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
\def\@{@}%
}
% There is no need to define \Etex.
% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
% have any width.
\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
% This space is always present above and below environments.
\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
%
\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
% =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
% \sectionheading, q.v.
\ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
\advance\envskipamount by \parskip
\endgraf
\ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
\removelastskip
% it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
% or better ...
\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
\vskip\envskipamount
\fi
\fi
}}
\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
\let\nonarrowing=\relax
% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
% environment contents.
\font\circle=lcircle10
\newdimen\circthick
\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
%
\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
\ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
\hskip\rskip}}
\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
\cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
\hskip\rskip}}
%
\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
\envdef\cartouche{%
\ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
\startsavinginserts
\lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
\leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
\cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
\advance\cartinner by-\rskip
\cartouter=\hsize
\advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
% side, and for 6pt waste from
% each corner char, and rule thickness
\normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
% Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
\let\nonarrowing = t%
%
% If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the
% \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can
% collide with the section heading.
\ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi
%
\vbox\bgroup
\baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
\carttop
\hbox\bgroup
\hskip\lskip
\vrule\kern3pt
\vbox\bgroup
\kern3pt
\hsize=\cartinner
\baselineskip=\normbskip
\lineskip=\normlskip
\parskip=\normpskip
\vskip -\parskip
\comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group.
}
\def\Ecartouche{%
\ifhmode\par\fi
\kern3pt
\egroup
\kern3pt\vrule
\hskip\rskip
\egroup
\cartbot
\egroup
\checkinserts
}
% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
% inside a group.
\newdimen\nonfillparindent
\def\nonfillstart{%
\aboveenvbreak
\hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
\sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
\let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
\obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
\parskip = 0pt
% Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate
% the normal \indent.
\nonfillparindent=\parindent
\parindent = 0pt
\let\indent\nonfillindent
%
\emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
\ifx\nonarrowing\relax
\advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
\exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
\else
\let\nonarrowing = \relax
\fi
\let\exdent=\nofillexdent
}
\begingroup
\obeyspaces
% We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake
% @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally
% active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after
% @indent.
\gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}%
\gdef\nonfillindentcheck{%
\ifx\temp %
\expandafter\nonfillindentgobble%
\else%
\leavevmode\nonfillindentbox%
\fi%
}%
\endgroup
\def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent}
\def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}}
% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
% This affects the following displayed environments:
% @example, @display, @format, @lisp
%
\def\smallword{small}
\def\nosmallword{nosmall}
\let\SETdispenvsize\relax
\def\setnormaldispenv{%
\ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
% end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank
% line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but
% we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient
% to change the fonts afterward.
\ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
\smallexamplefonts \rm
\fi
}
\def\setsmalldispenv{%
\ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
\else
\ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
\smallexamplefonts \rm
\fi
}
% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
% Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition.
\def\makedispenvdef#1#2{%
\expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}%
\expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}%
\expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
\expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
}
% Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment.
\def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{%
\makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}%
\makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}%
}
%
% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font;
% @example: same as @lisp.
%
% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
%
\maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{%
\nonfillstart
\tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}%
\let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
\gobble % eat return
}
% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
%
\makedispenvdef{display}{%
\nonfillstart
\gobble
}
% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
%
\makedispenvdef{format}{%
\let\nonarrowing = t%
\nonfillstart
\gobble
}
% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
\envdef\flushleft{%
\let\nonarrowing = t%
\nonfillstart
\gobble
}
\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
% @flushright.
%
\envdef\flushright{%
\let\nonarrowing = t%
\nonfillstart
\advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax
\gobble
}
\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
% @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right
% justification. From plain.tex.
\envdef\raggedright{%
\rightskip0pt plus2em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax
}
\let\Eraggedright\par
\envdef\raggedleft{%
\parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em
\spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
\hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
% badness reporting.
}
\let\Eraggedleft\par
\envdef\raggedcenter{%
\parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em
\spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
\hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
% badness reporting.
}
\let\Eraggedcenter\par
% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
%
\makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart}
%
\def\quotationstart{%
\indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too.
\ifx\nonarrowing\relax
\advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
\fi
\parsearg\quotationlabel
}
% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
% doing normal filling.
%
\def\Equotation{%
\par
\ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else
% indent a bit.
\leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
\fi
{\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
}
\def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation}
% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
\def\quotationlabel#1{%
\def\temp{#1}%
\ifx\temp\empty \else
{\bf #1: }%
\fi
}
% @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and
% has no optional argument.
%
\makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart}
%
\def\indentedblockstart{%
{\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
\parindent=0pt
%
% @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
\ifx\nonarrowing\relax
\advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
\exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
\else
\let\nonarrowing = \relax
\fi
}
% Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling.
%
\def\Eindentedblock{%
\par
{\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
}
\def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock}
% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{...}
% If we want to allow any as delimiter,
% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org
%
% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
%
% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
% verbatim line.
\def\dospecials{%
\do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
\do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
\do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
% Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and
% @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and
% @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled.
%\do\`\do\'%
}
%
% [Knuth] p. 380
\def\uncatcodespecials{%
\def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
%
% Setup for the @verb command.
%
% Eight spaces for a tab
\begingroup
\catcode`\^^I=\active
\gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
\endgroup
%
\def\setupverb{%
\tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
\def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
\setupmarkupstyle{verb}%
\tabeightspaces
% Respect line breaks,
% print special symbols as themselves, and
% make each space count
% must do in this order:
\obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
}
% Setup for the @verbatim environment
%
% Real tab expansion.
\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
%
% We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle
% tabs. The \global is in case the verbatim line starts with an accent,
% or some other command that starts with a begin-group. Otherwise, the
% entire \verbbox would disappear at the corresponding end-group, before
% it is typeset. Meanwhile, we can't have nested verbatim commands
% (can we?), so the \global won't be overwriting itself.
\newbox\verbbox
\def\starttabbox{\global\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup}
%
\begingroup
\catcode`\^^I=\active
\gdef\tabexpand{%
\catcode`\^^I=\active
\def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
\dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab
\divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw
\multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
\advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw
\wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox \box\verbbox \starttabbox
}%
}
\endgroup
% start the verbatim environment.
\def\setupverbatim{%
\let\nonarrowing = t%
\nonfillstart
\tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
% The \leavevmode here is for blank lines. Otherwise, we would
% never \starttabox and the \egroup would end verbatim mode.
\def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box\verbbox\endgraf}%
\tabexpand
\setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}%
% Respect line breaks,
% print special symbols as themselves, and
% make each space count.
% Must do in this order:
\obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
\everypar{\starttabbox}%
}
% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
%
% \def\doverb'{'#1'}'{#1}
%
% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
\begingroup
\catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
\gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
\endgroup
%
\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
%
%
% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
%
% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
%
% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
%
% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
%
\begingroup
\catcode`\ =\active
\obeylines %
% ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
% of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank
% line in the output.
\xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
% We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
% without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
\endgroup
%
\envdef\verbatim{%
\setupverbatim\doverbatim
}
\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
%
\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
%
\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
{%
\makevalueexpandable
\setupverbatim
\indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
\wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}%
\input #1
\afterenvbreak
}%
}
% @copying ... @end copying.
% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
%
% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
% possible is very desirable.
%
\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
%
\def\insertcopying{%
\begingroup
\parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
\scanexp\copyingtext
\endgroup
}
\message{defuns,}
% @defun etc.
\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
\newcount\defunpenalty
% Start the processing of @deffn:
\def\startdefun{%
\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
\medbreak
\defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the
% following @def command, see below.
\else
% If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
% which is there to keep the function description together with its
% header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
% break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
% by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
% commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
% a break between a section heading and a defun.
%
% As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
% with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the
% sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following
% @def command.
\ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
%
% Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
% But do insert the glue.
\medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
\fi
%
\parindent=0in
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
}
\def\dodefunx#1{%
% First, check whether we are in the right environment:
\checkenv#1%
%
% As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
% It's not a great place, though.
\ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
%
% And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
\expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
}
\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
%
\def\printdefunline#1#2{%
\begingroup
% call \deffnheader:
#1#2 \endheader
% common ending:
\interlinepenalty = 10000
\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax
\endgraf
\nobreak\vskip -\parskip
\penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
% Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
% rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize.
\checkparencounts
\endgroup
}
\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader.
%
\def\makedefun#1{%
\expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
\edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
\makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
\temp
}
% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
%
% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
%
\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
\envdef#1{%
\startdefun
\doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else
\parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
}%
\def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
\def#3%
}
\newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function?
\newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line?
% @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions
% are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun,
% @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod.
%
\parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{%
\def\temp{#1}%
\ifx\temp\onword
\expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
= \empty
\else\ifx\temp\offword
\expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
= \relax
\else
\errhelp = \EMsimple
\errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp',
must be on|off}%
\fi\fi
}
% Untyped functions:
% @deffn category name args
\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
% @deffn category class name args
\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
% \defopon {category on}class name args
\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
%
\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
% Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
\dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
\defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
}
% Typed functions:
% @deftypefn category type name args
\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
% @deftypeop category class type name args
\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
%
\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
\dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
\doingtypefntrue
\defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
}
% Typed variables:
% @deftypevr category type var args
\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
% @deftypecv category class type var args
\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
%
\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
\dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
\defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
}
% Untyped variables:
% @defvr category var args
\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
% @defcv category class var args
\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
% \defcvof {category of}class var args
\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
% Types:
% @deftp category name args
\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
\doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
\defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
}
% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
% #1 is the category, such as "Function".
% #2 is the return type, if any.
% #3 is the function name.
%
% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
%
\def\defname#1#2#3{%
\par
% Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
%
% Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function
% on a line by itself.
\rettypeownlinefalse
\ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically?
% then check user option for putting return type on its own line:
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else
\rettypeownlinetrue
\fi
\fi
%
% How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps
% distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
% just below it.
\def\temp{#1}%
\setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
%
% Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at
% least two.
\tempnum = 2
%
% The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
% we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
\dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
%
% If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line.
\ifrettypeownline
\advance\tempnum by 1
\def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}%
\else
\def\maybeshapeline{}%
\fi
%
% The continuations:
\dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
%
% The final paragraph shape:
\parshape \tempnum 0in \dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2
%
% Put the category name at the right margin.
\noindent
\hbox to 0pt{%
\hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
% \hsize has to be shortened this way:
\kern\leftskip
% Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
}%
%
% Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
\tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
{%
% defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
% . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
% . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
% common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in
% tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
% . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
% . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
% one has made identifiers using them :).
\df \tt
\def\temp{#2}% text of the return type
\ifx\temp\empty\else
\tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type
\ifrettypeownline
% put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following:
\hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break
\else
\space % type on same line, so just followed by a space
\fi
\fi % no return type
#3% output function name
}%
{\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
%
\boldbrax
% arguments will be output next, if any.
}
% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
%
\def\defunargs#1{%
% use sl by default (not ttsl),
% tt for the names.
\df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
%
% On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
% want a way to get ttsl. We used to recommend @var for that, so
% leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter.
% Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen
% and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny. @code also disables ?` !`.
\def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}%
#1%
\sl\hyphenchar\font=45
}
% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
%
\def\activeparens{%
\catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
\catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
\catcode`\&=\active
}
% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
{
\activeparens
\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
\global\let& = \&
\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
\gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
}
\newcount\parencount
% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
\newif\ifampseen
\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }}
\def\parenfont{%
\ifampseen
% At the first level, print parens in roman,
% otherwise use the default font.
\ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
\else
% The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
% the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] .
\sf
\fi
}
\def\infirstlevel#1{%
\ifampseen
\ifnum\parencount=1
#1%
\fi
\fi
}
\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
\def\opnr{%
\global\advance\parencount by 1
{\parenfont(}%
\infirstlevel \bfafterword
}
\def\clnr{%
{\parenfont)}%
\infirstlevel \sl
\global\advance\parencount by -1
}
\newcount\brackcount
\def\lbrb{%
\global\advance\brackcount by 1
{\bf[}%
}
\def\rbrb{%
{\bf]}%
\global\advance\brackcount by -1
}
\def\checkparencounts{%
\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
\ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
}
% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually
% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers).
\def\badparencount{%
\message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}%
\global\parencount=0
}
\def\badbrackcount{%
\message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}%
\global\brackcount=0
}
\message{macros,}
% @macro.
% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
\newwrite\macscribble
\def\scantokens#1{%
\toks0={#1}%
\immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
\immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
\immediate\closeout\macscribble
\input \jobname.tmp
}
\fi
\def\scanmacro#1{\begingroup
\newlinechar`\^^M
\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
%
% Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
% When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
% backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had
% \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears
% with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04
\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
%
% ... and for \example:
\spaceisspace
%
% The \empty here causes a following catcode 5 newline to be eaten as
% part of reading whitespace after a control sequence. It does not
% eat a catcode 13 newline. There's no good way to handle the two
% cases (untried: maybe e-TeX's \everyeof could help, though plain TeX
% would then have different behavior). See the Macro Details node in
% the manual for the workaround we recommend for macros and
% line-oriented commands.
%
\scantokens{#1\empty}%
\endgroup}
\def\scanexp#1{%
\edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
\temp
}
\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
\newtoks\macname % Macro name
\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
% List of all defined macros in the form
% \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2...
% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
% if there is a need.
\def\macrolist{}
% Add the macro to \macrolist
\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
\toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}%
\xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
}
% Utility routines.
% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
% (except of course we have to play expansion games).
%
\def\cslet#1#2{%
\expandafter\let
\csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
\csname#2\endcsname
}
% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
{\catcode`\@=11
\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
\def\unbrace#1{#1}
\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
}
% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
}
% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \
% to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash.
%
% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate
% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to
% confine the change to the current group.
%
% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
%
\def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine
\catcode`\"=\other
\catcode`\+=\other
\catcode`\<=\other
\catcode`\>=\other
\catcode`\@=\other
\catcode`\^=\other
\catcode`\_=\other
\catcode`\|=\other
\catcode`\~=\other
\ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi
}
\def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros.
\scanctxt
\catcode`\\=\other
\catcode`\^^M=\other
}
\def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions
\scanctxt
\catcode`\{=\other
\catcode`\}=\other
\catcode`\^^M=\other
\usembodybackslash
}
\def\macroargctxt{% used when scanning invocations
\scanctxt
\catcode`\\=0
}
% why catcode 0 for \ in the above? To recognize \\ \{ \} as "escapes"
% for the single characters \ { }. Thus, we end up with the "commands"
% that would be written @\ @{ @} in a Texinfo document.
%
% We already have @{ and @}. For @\, we define it here, and only for
% this purpose, to produce a typewriter backslash (so, the @\ that we
% define for @math can't be used with @macro calls):
%
\def\\{\normalbackslash}%
%
% We would like to do this for \, too, since that is what makeinfo does.
% But it is not possible, because Texinfo already has a command @, for a
% cedilla accent. Documents must use @comma{} instead.
%
% \anythingelse will almost certainly be an error of some kind.
% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
% where N is the macro parameter number.
% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
%
{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
@gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
@gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
}
\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
\def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 }
\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
\def\macroxxx#1{%
\getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
\ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
\paramno=0\relax
\else
\expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
\if\paramno>256\relax
\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
\errhelp = \EMsimple
\errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments}
\fi
\fi
\fi
\if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
\message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
\else
\expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
\else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
\global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
\global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
\addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
\fi
\begingroup \macrobodyctxt
\ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
\else \expandafter\parsemacbody
\fi}
\parseargdef\unmacro{%
\if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
\global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
\global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
% Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
\begingroup
\expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
\let\definedummyword\unmacrodo
\xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
\endgroup
\else
\errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
\fi
}
% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any
% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
%
\def\unmacrodo#1{%
\ifx #1\relax
% remove this
\else
\noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1%
\fi
}
% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
% is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
\def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
% For macro processing make @ a letter so that we can make Texinfo private macro names.
\edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@}
\catcode `@=11\relax
% Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist
% so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH
% in the params list to some hook where the argument si to be expanded. If
% there are less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N
% is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be
% defined `a la TeX in the macro body.
%
% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
%
% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
% it to # just before using the token list produced.
%
% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
% the macro is used.
%
% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the
% hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is
% processed again to replace the arguments.
%
% In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the
% argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of
% the catcode regime underwhich the body was input).
%
% If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more
% arguments, you need that no macro has more than 256 arguments, otherwise an
% error is produced.
\def\parsemargdef#1;{%
\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
\let\hash\relax
\let\xeatspaces\relax
\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,%
% In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments
% list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to
% each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list
% in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments
% are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining
% twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power.
\ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else
\paramno0\relax
\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments
\fi
}
\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
\if#1;\let\next=\relax
\else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
\advance\paramno by 1
\expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
{\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
\edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
\fi\next}
\def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{%
\if#1;\let\next=\relax
\else
\let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@
\edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}%
\expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa
\expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}%
% Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we
% don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an
% \xdef .
\expandafter\edef\tempa
{\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}%
\advance\paramno by 1\relax
\fi\next}
% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
%
\catcode `\@\texiatcatcode
\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
\catcode `\@=11\relax
\let\endargs@\relax
\let\nil@\relax
\def\nilm@{\nil@}%
\long\def\nillm@{\nil@}%
% This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its
% definition. It gets all the arguments values and assigns them to macros
% macarg.ARGNAME
%
% #1 is the macro name
% #2 is the list of argument names
% #3 is the list of argument values
\def\getargvals@#1#2#3{%
\def\macargdeflist@{}%
\def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion.
\def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}%
\def\macroname{#1}%
\begingroup
\macroargctxt
\def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}%
\def\@tempa{#3}%
\ifx\@tempa\empty
\setemptyargvalues@
\else
\getargvals@@
\fi
}
%
\def\getargvals@@{%
\ifx\paramlist\nilm@
% Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty.
\ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
\else
\errhelp = \EMsimple
\errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}%
\fi
\let\next\macargexpandinbody@
\else
\ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
% No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg
% macros to empty.
\let\next\setemptyargvalues@
\else
% pop current arg name into \@tempb
\def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}%
\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}%
% pop current argument value into \@tempc
\def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}%
\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}%
% Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value.
% First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd
\expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}%
\expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax
\expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{%
\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}%
\edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}%
\push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@
\let\next\getargvals@@
\fi
\fi
\next
}
\def\push@#1#2{%
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2%
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
\expandafter#1#2}%
}
% Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result
% in macro \@tempa
\def\macvalstoargs@{%
% To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed
% within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument
% values into respective token registers.
%
% First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering.
\begingroup
\paramno0\relax
% Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument
% value into a new token list register \toks#N
\expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,%
% Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their
% values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they
% are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef .
\edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}%
% Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers
% which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after
% group.
\expandafter
\endgroup
\expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}%
}
\def\macargexpandinbody@{%
%% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group.
\expandafter
\endgroup
\macargdeflist@
% First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result
% is in \@tempa .
\macvalstoargs@
% Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value
% with \@tempb .
\expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname
% Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing
% \egroup .
\ifx\@tempb\gobble
\let\@tempc\relax
\else
\let\@tempc\egroup
\fi
% And now we do the real job:
\edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}%
\@tempd
}
\def\putargsintokens@#1,{%
\if#1;\let\next\relax
\else
\let\next\putargsintokens@
% First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary
% alias \@tempb .
\toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno
% Then we place the argument value into that token list register.
\expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname
\expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}%
\advance\paramno by 1\relax
\fi
\next
}
% Save the token stack pointer into macro #1
\def\texisavetoksstackpoint#1{\edef#1{\the\@cclvi}}
% Restore the token stack pointer from number in macro #1
\def\texirestoretoksstackpoint#1{\expandafter\mathchardef\expandafter\@cclvi#1\relax}
% newtoks that can be used non \outer .
\def\texinonouternewtoks{\alloc@ 5\toks \toksdef \@cclvi}
% Tailing missing arguments are set to empty
\def\setemptyargvalues@{%
\ifx\paramlist\nilm@
\let\next\macargexpandinbody@
\else
\expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@
\let\next\setemptyargvalues@
\fi
\next
}
\def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{%
\expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{%
\expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}%
\push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@
\def\paramlist{#2}%
}
% #1 is the element target macro
% #2 is the list macro
% #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value
\def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
\def#1{#3}%
\def#2{#4}%
}
\long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
\long\def#1{#3}%
\long\def#2{#4}%
}
% This defines a Texinfo @macro. There are eight cases: recursive and
% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments.
% Much magic with \expandafter here.
% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
%
\def\defmacro{%
\let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
\ifrecursive
\ifcase\paramno
% 0
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
\or % 1
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
\noexpand\braceorline
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
\else
\ifnum\paramno<10\relax % at most 9
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
\expandafter\expandafter
\expandafter\xdef
\expandafter\expandafter
\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
\paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
\else % 10 or more
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
\noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}%
}%
\global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp
\global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble
\fi
\fi
\else
\ifcase\paramno
% 0
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
\or % 1
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
\noexpand\braceorline
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
\egroup
\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
\else % at most 9
\ifnum\paramno<10\relax
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
\expandafter\expandafter
\expandafter\xdef
\expandafter\expandafter
\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
\paramlist{%
\egroup
\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
\else % 10 or more:
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
\noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}%
}%
\global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp
\global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\norecurse
\fi
\fi
\fi}
\catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax
\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
% {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
% line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg).
%
\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
\def\braceorlinexxx{%
\ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
\expandafter\parsearg
\fi \macnamexxx}
% @alias.
% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
% sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
%
\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
{%
\expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
\addtomacrolist{#1}%
\xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
}%
\next
}
\message{cross references,}
\newwrite\auxfile
\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
% @inforef is relatively simple.
\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{%
\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and
% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
% @node foo , bar , ...
% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
%
\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
%
% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs
\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
\let\nwnode=\node
\let\lastnode=\empty
% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the
% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
%
\def\donoderef#1{%
\ifx\lastnode\empty\else
\setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
\global\let\lastnode=\empty
\fi
}
% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
%
\newcount\savesfregister
%
\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
% anchor), which consists of three parts:
% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection,
% or the anchor name.
% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
% empty for anchors.
% 3) NAME-pg - the page number.
%
% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of
% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
%
\def\setref#1#2{%
\pdfmkdest{#1}%
\iflinks
{%
\atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them
\edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
\write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
}%
\toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}%
\immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
\immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
\safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout
}%
\fi
}
% @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used
% automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified.
% This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title
% variable, now it's official.
%
\parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{%
\def\temp{#1}%
\ifx\temp\onword
\expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
= \empty
\else\ifx\temp\offword
\expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
= \relax
\else
\errhelp = \EMsimple
\errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp',
must be on|off}%
\fi\fi
}
%
% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
% manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
%
\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
%
\newbox\toprefbox
\newbox\printedrefnamebox
\newbox\infofilenamebox
\newbox\printedmanualbox
%
\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
\unsepspaces
%
% Get args without leading/trailing spaces.
\def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
\setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
%
\def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}%
\setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}%
%
\def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
\setbox\printedmanualbox = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
%
% If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in
% the @xref, figure out what we want to use.
\ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
% No printed node name was explicitly given.
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax
% Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets.
\def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
\else
% Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside
% the square brackets if we have it.
\ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
% It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name.
\def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
\else
\ifhavexrefs
% We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values.
\def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
\else
% Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
\def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
\fi%
\fi
\fi
\fi
%
% Make link in pdf output.
\ifpdf
{\indexnofonts
\turnoffactive
\makevalueexpandable
% This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
% etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in
% #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename.
\getfilename{#4}%
%
% This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing
% spaces in #1, which should be ignored.
\edef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
\ifx\pdfxrefdest\empty
\def\pdfxrefdest{Top}% no empty targets
\else
\txiescapepdf\pdfxrefdest % escape PDF special chars
\fi
%
\leavevmode
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
\ifnum\filenamelength>0
goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}%
\else
goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
\fi
}%
\setcolor{\linkcolor}%
\fi
%
% Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
% instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the
% LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
{%
% Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
% include an _ in the xref name, etc.
\indexnofonts
\turnoffactive
\expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
\csname XR#1-title\endcsname
}%
\iffloat\Xthisreftitle
% If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
% print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
\ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
\refx{#1-snt}{}%
\else
\printedrefname
\fi
%
% If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
% "in MANUALNAME".
\ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
\space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
\fi
\else
% node/anchor (non-float) references.
%
% If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert
% empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not
% find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
% are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens,
% this is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name
% again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
%
\ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
% Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name.
%
\crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}%
%
\else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt
% Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no
% printed manual name (arg 5). This is essentially the same as
% the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else.
%
\crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}%
%
\else
% Reference within this manual.
%
% _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
% control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
% into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
% printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
% printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
{\turnoffactive
% Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
% @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
\ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
}%
% output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden.
\xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
%
% But we always want a comma and a space:
,\space
%
% output the `page 3'.
\turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
\fi\fi
\fi
\endlink
\endgroup}
% Output a cross-manual xref to #1. Used just above (twice).
%
% Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither
% missing or Top. Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply
% "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual.
%
% But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the
% string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in
% the input. By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less
% likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g.,
% in a monospaced font). Hopefully it will never happen in practice.
%
% For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every
% reference, since the current font is indeterminate.
%
\def\crossmanualxref#1{%
\setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}%
\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}%
\ifdim \wd2 > 7sp % nonempty?
\ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else % same as Top?
\putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space
\fi
\fi
#1%
}
% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly
% one that Bob is working on :).
%
\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
% Things referred to by \setref.
%
\def\Ynothing{}
\def\Yomitfromtoc{}
\def\Ynumbered{%
\ifnum\secno=0
\putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
\else \ifnum\subsecno=0
\putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
\else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
\putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
\else
\putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
\fi\fi\fi
}
\def\Yappendix{%
\ifnum\secno=0
\putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
\else \ifnum\subsecno=0
\putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
\else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
\putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
\else
\putwordSection@tie
@char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
\fi\fi\fi
}
% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
%
\def\refx#1#2{%
{%
\indexnofonts
\otherbackslash
\expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
\csname XR#1\endcsname
}%
\ifx\thisrefX\relax
% If not defined, say something at least.
\angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
\iflinks
\ifhavexrefs
{\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value
\message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}%
\else
\ifwarnedxrefs\else
\global\warnedxrefstrue
\message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
\fi
\fi
\fi
\else
% It's defined, so just use it.
\thisrefX
\fi
#2% Output the suffix in any case.
}
% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's
% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
% collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
%
\def\xrdef#1#2{%
{% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current
% implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these
% mess up the control sequence name.
\indexnofonts
\turnoffactive
\xdef\safexrefname{#1}%
}%
%
\expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref
%
% Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
\expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname
% it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
\expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
%
% Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
\expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
\toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
\else
% had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
\toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
\fi
%
% Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
% for later use in \listoffloats.
\expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0
{\safexrefname}}%
\fi
}
% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
%
\def\tryauxfile{%
\openin 1 \jobname.aux
\ifeof 1 \else
\readdatafile{aux}%
\global\havexrefstrue
\fi
\closein 1
}
\def\setupdatafile{%
\catcode`\^^@=\other
\catcode`\^^A=\other
\catcode`\^^B=\other
\catcode`\^^C=\other
\catcode`\^^D=\other
\catcode`\^^E=\other
\catcode`\^^F=\other
\catcode`\^^G=\other
\catcode`\^^H=\other
\catcode`\^^K=\other
\catcode`\^^L=\other
\catcode`\^^N=\other
\catcode`\^^P=\other
\catcode`\^^Q=\other
\catcode`\^^R=\other
\catcode`\^^S=\other
\catcode`\^^T=\other
\catcode`\^^U=\other
\catcode`\^^V=\other
\catcode`\^^W=\other
\catcode`\^^X=\other
\catcode`\^^Z=\other
\catcode`\^^[=\other
\catcode`\^^\=\other
\catcode`\^^]=\other
\catcode`\^^^=\other
\catcode`\^^_=\other
% It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
% in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
% supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
% that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
% character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
% b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
% argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
% all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
%
% The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
% \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
% and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
%
\catcode`\^=\other
%
% Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but...
\catcode`\~=\other
\catcode`\[=\other
\catcode`\]=\other
\catcode`\"=\other
\catcode`\_=\other
\catcode`\|=\other
\catcode`\<=\other
\catcode`\>=\other
\catcode`\$=\other
\catcode`\#=\other
\catcode`\&=\other
\catcode`\%=\other
\catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
%
% This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
% characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than
% leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
% character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
% of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
% should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for
% now. --karl, 15jan04.
\catcode`\\=\other
%
% Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
{%
\count1=128
\def\loop{%
\catcode\count1=\other
\advance\count1 by 1
\ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi
}%
}%
%
% @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
\catcode`\{=1
\catcode`\}=2
\catcode`\@=0
}
\def\readdatafile#1{%
\begingroup
\setupdatafile
\input\jobname.#1
\endgroup}
\message{insertions,}
% including footnotes.
\newcount \footnoteno
% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
% @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only.
\let\footnotestyle=\comment
{\catcode `\@=11
%
% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
\gdef\footnote{%
\let\indent=\ptexindent
\let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
\global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
\edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
%
% In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
% extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
\let\@sf\empty
\ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
%
% Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
\unskip
\thisfootno\@sf
\dofootnote
}%
% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
%
% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
%
\gdef\dofootnote{%
\insert\footins\bgroup
% We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
% footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
% So reset some parameters.
\hsize=\pagewidth
\interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
\splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
\splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
\floatingpenalty\@MM
\leftskip\z@skip
\rightskip\z@skip
\spaceskip\z@skip
\xspaceskip\z@skip
\parindent\defaultparindent
%
\smallfonts \rm
%
% Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
% to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use
% hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
% text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
\let\noindent = \relax
%
% Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the
% footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
\everypar = {\hang}%
\textindent{\thisfootno}%
%
% Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
% expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
% provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
\footstrut
%
% Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine.
\futurelet\next\fo@t
}
}%end \catcode `\@=11
% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion
% would be lost.
% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03.
% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
% out prematurely.
%
\def\startsavinginserts{%
\ifx \insert\ptexinsert
\let\insert\saveinsert
\else
\let\checkinserts\relax
\fi
}
% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
%
\def\saveinsert#1{%
\edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
\afterassignment\next
% swallow the left brace
\let\temp =
}
\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
\def\placesaveins#1{%
\ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
{\box#1}%
}
% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
{
\def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-)
\gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
}
% initialization:
\def\newsaveins #1{%
\edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
\next
}
\def\newsaveinsX #1{%
\csname newbox\endcsname #1%
\expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
\checksaveins #1}%
}
% initialize:
\let\checkinserts\empty
\newsaveins\footins
\newsaveins\margin
% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
%
% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
% undone and the next image would fail.
\openin 1 = epsf.tex
\ifeof 1 \else
% Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
% doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
\def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
\input epsf.tex
\fi
\closein 1
%
% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
%
\def\image#1{%
\ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined
\ifwarnednoepsf \else
\errhelp = \noepsfhelp
\errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
\global\warnednoepsftrue
\fi
\else
\imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
\fi
}
%
% Arguments to @image:
% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff.
\newif\ifimagevmode
\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
\catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
\normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names
% If the image is by itself, center it.
\ifvmode
\imagevmodetrue
\else \ifx\centersub\centerV
% for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space
\imagevmodetrue
\vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev
\fi\fi
%
\ifimagevmode
\nobreak\medskip
% Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
% \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
% above and below.
\nobreak\vskip\parskip
\nobreak
\fi
%
% Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing
% environment such as @quotation is respected.
% However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the
% normal paragraph indentation.
% On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't
% want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and
% eradicate the centering.
\ifx\centersub\centerV\else \noindent \fi
%
% Output the image.
\ifpdf
\dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
\else
% \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
\epsfbox{#1.eps}%
\fi
%
\ifimagevmode
\medskip % space after a standalone image
\fi
\ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi
\endgroup}
% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future.
%
\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted,
% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
%
% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to
% be referable.
%
% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It
% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
%
% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
% chapter-level command.
\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
%
\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
\let\thiscaption=\empty
\let\thisshortcaption=\empty
%
% don't lose footnotes inside @float.
%
% BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
% insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
%
\startsavinginserts
%
% We can't be used inside a paragraph.
\par
%
\vtop\bgroup
\def\floattype{#1}%
\def\floatlabel{#2}%
\def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
%
\ifx\floattype\empty
\let\safefloattype=\empty
\else
{%
% the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
% but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
\indexnofonts
\turnoffactive
\xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
}%
\fi
%
% If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
\ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
% We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
% Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.)
%
\expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
\global\advance\floatno by 1
%
{%
% This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the
% XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
% labels (which have a completely different output format) from
% node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the
% lists of floats.
%
\edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
\setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
}%
\fi
%
% start with \parskip glue, I guess.
\vskip\parskip
%
% Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
\restorefirstparagraphindent
}
% we have these possibilities:
% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1
% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap
% @float Foo & no caption: Foo
% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap
% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1
% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap
% @float & no caption:
%
\def\Efloat{%
\let\floatident = \empty
%
% In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
\ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
%
% If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
\ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
\ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
\appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
\fi
% the number.
\appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
\fi
%
% Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
% \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
\let\captionline = \floatident
%
\ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
\ifx\floatident\empty \else
\appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
\fi
%
% caption text.
\appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
\fi
%
% If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
% Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
\ifx\captionline\empty \else
\vskip.5\parskip
\captionline
%
% Space below caption.
\vskip\parskip
\fi
%
% If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this
% after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
\ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
% Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
% \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short
% caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
{%
\atdummies
%
% since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
% is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
% we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
\scanexp{%
\xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
\ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
\thiscaption
\else
\thisshortcaption
\fi
}%
}%
\immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
\ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
}%
\fi
\egroup % end of \vtop
%
% place the captured inserts
%
% BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning
% whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly
% float. --kasal, 26may04
%
\checkinserts
}
% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
%
\def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
\expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
}
% @caption, @shortcaption
%
\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
\def\getfloatno#1{%
\ifx#1\relax
% Haven't seen this figure type before.
\csname newcount\endcsname #1%
%
% Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
\expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
\expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
\fi
\let\floatno#1%
}
% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref
% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we
% first read the @float command.
%
\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
% distinguish floats from other xref types.
\def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic
% \lastsection value which we \setref above.
%
\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
%
% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the
% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2.
%
\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
\def\temp{#1}%
\def\iffloattype{#2}%
\ifx\temp\floatmagic
}
% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
%
\parseargdef\listoffloats{%
\def\floattype{#1}% floattype
{%
% the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
% but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
\indexnofonts
\turnoffactive
\xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
}%
%
% \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
\expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
\ifhavexrefs
% if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
\message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
\fi
\else
\begingroup
\leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc
\let\do=\listoffloatsdo
\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
\endgroup
\fi
}
% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the
% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
% has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
%
% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
% they won't appear in the aux file).
%
\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
% Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just
% pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
% page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
% in pdf output.
\toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
%
% use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
\edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
\writeentry
}}
\message{localization,}
% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very
% early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language
% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation.
%
{
\catcode`\_ = \active
\globaldefs=1
\parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup
\let_=\normalunderscore % normal _ character for filenames
\tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
% Read the file by the name they passed if it exists.
\openin 1 txi-#1.tex
\ifeof 1
\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}%
\else
\globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
\input txi-#1.tex
\fi
\closein 1
\endgroup % end raw TeX
\endgroup}
%
% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist,
% try txi-de.tex.
%
\gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{%
\openin 1 txi-#1.tex
\ifeof 1
\errhelp = \nolanghelp
\errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
\else
\globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
\input txi-#1.tex
\fi
\closein 1
}
}% end of special _ catcode
%
\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current
directory should work if nowhere else does.}
% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the
% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and
% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin.
%
% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built.
% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g.,
% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log.
%
% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all
% available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in
% Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the
% accented characters problem.)
%
\catcode`@=11
\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{%
% do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX.
\expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax
\message{no patterns for #1}%
\else
\global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname
\fi
% but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless.
\global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax
\global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax
}
% Helpers for encodings.
% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number.
%
\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{%
\count255=128
\loop\ifnum\count255<256
\global\catcode\count255=#1\relax
\advance\count255 by 1
\repeat
}
\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{%
\count255=128
\loop\ifnum\count255<256
\catcode\count255=#1\relax
\advance\count255 by 1
\repeat
}
% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters
% according to the specified encoding.
%
\parseargdef\documentencoding{%
% Encoding being declared for the document.
\def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}%
%
% Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able
% to compare them with \ifx.
\def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}%
\def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}%
\def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}%
\def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}%
\def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}%
%
\ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
\asciichardefs
%
\else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo
\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
\lattwochardefs
%
\else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
\latonechardefs
%
\else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine
\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
\latninechardefs
%
\else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
\utfeightchardefs
%
\else
\message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}%
%
\fi % utfeight
\fi % latnine
\fi % latone
\fi % lattwo
\fi % ascii
}
% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available
% the default font encoding (OT1).
%
\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}}
% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference.
\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi}
% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be
% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of
% macros containing the character definitions.
\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
%
% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
\def\latonechardefs{%
\gdef^^a0{\tie}
\gdef^^a1{\exclamdown}
\gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}}
\gdef^^a3{{\pounds}}
\gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
\gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}}
\gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}}
\gdef^^a7{\S}
\gdef^^a8{\"{}}
\gdef^^a9{\copyright}
\gdef^^aa{\ordf}
\gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft}
\gdef^^ac{$\lnot$}
\gdef^^ad{\-}
\gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol}
\gdef^^af{\={}}
%
\gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
\gdef^^b1{$\pm$}
\gdef^^b2{$^2$}
\gdef^^b3{$^3$}
\gdef^^b4{\'{}}
\gdef^^b5{$\mu$}
\gdef^^b6{\P}
%
\gdef^^b7{$^.$}
\gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
\gdef^^b9{$^1$}
\gdef^^ba{\ordm}
%
\gdef^^bb{\guillemetright}
\gdef^^bc{$1\over4$}
\gdef^^bd{$1\over2$}
\gdef^^be{$3\over4$}
\gdef^^bf{\questiondown}
%
\gdef^^c0{\`A}
\gdef^^c1{\'A}
\gdef^^c2{\^A}
\gdef^^c3{\~A}
\gdef^^c4{\"A}
\gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A}
\gdef^^c6{\AE}
\gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
\gdef^^c8{\`E}
\gdef^^c9{\'E}
\gdef^^ca{\^E}
\gdef^^cb{\"E}
\gdef^^cc{\`I}
\gdef^^cd{\'I}
\gdef^^ce{\^I}
\gdef^^cf{\"I}
%
\gdef^^d0{\DH}
\gdef^^d1{\~N}
\gdef^^d2{\`O}
\gdef^^d3{\'O}
\gdef^^d4{\^O}
\gdef^^d5{\~O}
\gdef^^d6{\"O}
\gdef^^d7{$\times$}
\gdef^^d8{\O}
\gdef^^d9{\`U}
\gdef^^da{\'U}
\gdef^^db{\^U}
\gdef^^dc{\"U}
\gdef^^dd{\'Y}
\gdef^^de{\TH}
\gdef^^df{\ss}
%
\gdef^^e0{\`a}
\gdef^^e1{\'a}
\gdef^^e2{\^a}
\gdef^^e3{\~a}
\gdef^^e4{\"a}
\gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a}
\gdef^^e6{\ae}
\gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
\gdef^^e8{\`e}
\gdef^^e9{\'e}
\gdef^^ea{\^e}
\gdef^^eb{\"e}
\gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}}
\gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}}
\gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}}
\gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}}
%
\gdef^^f0{\dh}
\gdef^^f1{\~n}
\gdef^^f2{\`o}
\gdef^^f3{\'o}
\gdef^^f4{\^o}
\gdef^^f5{\~o}
\gdef^^f6{\"o}
\gdef^^f7{$\div$}
\gdef^^f8{\o}
\gdef^^f9{\`u}
\gdef^^fa{\'u}
\gdef^^fb{\^u}
\gdef^^fc{\"u}
\gdef^^fd{\'y}
\gdef^^fe{\th}
\gdef^^ff{\"y}
}
% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions.
\def\latninechardefs{%
% Encoding is almost identical to Latin1.
\latonechardefs
%
\gdef^^a4{\euro}
\gdef^^a6{\v S}
\gdef^^a8{\v s}
\gdef^^b4{\v Z}
\gdef^^b8{\v z}
\gdef^^bc{\OE}
\gdef^^bd{\oe}
\gdef^^be{\"Y}
}
% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions.
\def\lattwochardefs{%
\gdef^^a0{\tie}
\gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}}
\gdef^^a2{\u{}}
\gdef^^a3{\L}
\gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
\gdef^^a5{\v L}
\gdef^^a6{\'S}
\gdef^^a7{\S}
\gdef^^a8{\"{}}
\gdef^^a9{\v S}
\gdef^^aa{\cedilla S}
\gdef^^ab{\v T}
\gdef^^ac{\'Z}
\gdef^^ad{\-}
\gdef^^ae{\v Z}
\gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z}
%
\gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
\gdef^^b1{\ogonek{a}}
\gdef^^b2{\ogonek{ }}
\gdef^^b3{\l}
\gdef^^b4{\'{}}
\gdef^^b5{\v l}
\gdef^^b6{\'s}
\gdef^^b7{\v{}}
\gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
\gdef^^b9{\v s}
\gdef^^ba{\cedilla s}
\gdef^^bb{\v t}
\gdef^^bc{\'z}
\gdef^^bd{\H{}}
\gdef^^be{\v z}
\gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z}
%
\gdef^^c0{\'R}
\gdef^^c1{\'A}
\gdef^^c2{\^A}
\gdef^^c3{\u A}
\gdef^^c4{\"A}
\gdef^^c5{\'L}
\gdef^^c6{\'C}
\gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
\gdef^^c8{\v C}
\gdef^^c9{\'E}
\gdef^^ca{\ogonek{E}}
\gdef^^cb{\"E}
\gdef^^cc{\v E}
\gdef^^cd{\'I}
\gdef^^ce{\^I}
\gdef^^cf{\v D}
%
\gdef^^d0{\DH}
\gdef^^d1{\'N}
\gdef^^d2{\v N}
\gdef^^d3{\'O}
\gdef^^d4{\^O}
\gdef^^d5{\H O}
\gdef^^d6{\"O}
\gdef^^d7{$\times$}
\gdef^^d8{\v R}
\gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U}
\gdef^^da{\'U}
\gdef^^db{\H U}
\gdef^^dc{\"U}
\gdef^^dd{\'Y}
\gdef^^de{\cedilla T}
\gdef^^df{\ss}
%
\gdef^^e0{\'r}
\gdef^^e1{\'a}
\gdef^^e2{\^a}
\gdef^^e3{\u a}
\gdef^^e4{\"a}
\gdef^^e5{\'l}
\gdef^^e6{\'c}
\gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
\gdef^^e8{\v c}
\gdef^^e9{\'e}
\gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}}
\gdef^^eb{\"e}
\gdef^^ec{\v e}
\gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}}
\gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}}
\gdef^^ef{\v d}
%
\gdef^^f0{\dh}
\gdef^^f1{\'n}
\gdef^^f2{\v n}
\gdef^^f3{\'o}
\gdef^^f4{\^o}
\gdef^^f5{\H o}
\gdef^^f6{\"o}
\gdef^^f7{$\div$}
\gdef^^f8{\v r}
\gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u}
\gdef^^fa{\'u}
\gdef^^fb{\H u}
\gdef^^fc{\"u}
\gdef^^fd{\'y}
\gdef^^fe{\cedilla t}
\gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}}
}
% UTF-8 character definitions.
%
% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some
% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by
% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team.
%
\newcount\countUTFx
\newcount\countUTFy
\newcount\countUTFz
\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter
\UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}
%
\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter
\UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}
%
\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter
\UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}
\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{%
\ifx #1\relax
\message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}%
\else
\expandafter #1%
\fi
}
\begingroup
\catcode`\~13
\catcode`\"12
\def\UTFviiiLoop{%
\global\catcode\countUTFx\active
\uccode`\~\countUTFx
\uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}%
\advance\countUTFx by 1
\ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy
\expandafter\UTFviiiLoop
\fi}
\countUTFx = "C2
\countUTFy = "E0
\def\UTFviiiTmp{%
\xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}}
\UTFviiiLoop
\countUTFx = "E0
\countUTFy = "F0
\def\UTFviiiTmp{%
\xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}}
\UTFviiiLoop
\countUTFx = "F0
\countUTFy = "F4
\def\UTFviiiTmp{%
\xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}}
\UTFviiiLoop
\endgroup
\begingroup
\catcode`\"=12
\catcode`\<=12
\catcode`\.=12
\catcode`\,=12
\catcode`\;=12
\catcode`\!=12
\catcode`\~=13
\gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{%
\countUTFz = "#1\relax
%\wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}%
\begingroup
\parseXMLCharref
\def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{%
\csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}%
\def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{%
\csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}%
\def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{%
\csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}%
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}%
\endgroup}
\gdef\parseXMLCharref{%
\ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax
\errhelp = \EMsimple
\errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}%
\else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax
\parseUTFviiiA,%
\parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,%
\else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax
\parseUTFviiiA;%
\parseUTFviiiA,%
\parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}%
\else
\parseUTFviiiA;%
\parseUTFviiiA,%
\parseUTFviiiA!%
\parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}%
\fi\fi\fi
}
\gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{%
\countUTFx = \countUTFz
\divide\countUTFz by 64
\countUTFy = \countUTFz
\multiply\countUTFz by 64
\advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz
\advance\countUTFx by 128
\uccode `#1\countUTFx
\countUTFz = \countUTFy}
\gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{%
\advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax
\uccode `#3\countUTFz
\uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}}
\endgroup
\def\utfeightchardefs{%
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point}
\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv}
}% end of \utfeightchardefs
% US-ASCII character definitions.
\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done
\relax
}
% Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with
% existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a
% document encoding.
%
\setnonasciicharscatcode \other
\message{formatting,}
\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
\vbadness = 10000
% Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
\hbadness = 6666
% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans.
\widowpenalty=10000
\clubpenalty=10000
% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
%
\def\setemergencystretch{%
\ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
% Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
\def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
\else
\emergencystretch = .15\hsize
\fi
}
% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
%
% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip.
%
\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
\voffset = #3\relax
\topskip = #6\relax
\splittopskip = \topskip
%
\vsize = #1\relax
\advance\vsize by \topskip
\outervsize = \vsize
\advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
\pageheight = \vsize
%
\hsize = #2\relax
\outerhsize = \hsize
\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
\pagewidth = \hsize
%
\normaloffset = #4\relax
\bindingoffset = #5\relax
%
\ifpdf
\pdfpageheight #7\relax
\pdfpagewidth #8\relax
% if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of
% whatever layout pdftex was dumped with.
\pdfhorigin = 1 true in
\pdfvorigin = 1 true in
\fi
%
\setleading{\textleading}
%
\parindent = \defaultparindent
\setemergencystretch
}
% @letterpaper (the default).
\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
\textleading = 13.2pt
%
% If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
\internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines
{\voffset}{.25in}%
{\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
{11in}{8.5in}%
}}
% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
\parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
\textleading = 12pt
%
\internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
{-.2in}{0in}%
{\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
{9.25in}{7in}%
%
\lispnarrowing = 0.3in
\tolerance = 700
\hfuzz = 1pt
\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
\defbodyindent = .5cm
}}
% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
\parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
\textleading = 12pt
%
\internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
{-.2in}{-.4in}%
{0pt}{14pt}%
{9in}{6in}%
%
\lispnarrowing = 0.25in
\tolerance = 700
\hfuzz = 1pt
\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
\defbodyindent = .4cm
}}
% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
\textleading = 13.2pt
%
% Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
% prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
% To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
% \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then
% do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in
% your texinfo source file like this:
% @tex
% \global\normaloffset = -6mm
% \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
% @end tex
\internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines
{\voffset}{\hoffset}%
{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
{297mm}{210mm}%
%
\tolerance = 700
\hfuzz = 1pt
\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
\defbodyindent = 5mm
}}
% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
\parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
\textleading = 12.5pt
%
\internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
{\voffset}{\hoffset}%
{\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
{210mm}{148mm}%
%
\lispnarrowing = 0.2in
\tolerance = 800
\hfuzz = 1.2pt
\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
\defbodyindent = 2mm
\tableindent = 12mm
}}
% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
\afourpaper
\internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
{\voffset}{4.6mm}%
{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
{297mm}{210mm}%
%
% Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
\globaldefs = 0
}}
% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
\afourpaper
\internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
{\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
{297mm}{210mm}%
\globaldefs = 0
}}
% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
%
\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
\globaldefs = 1
%
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
\setleading{\textleading}%
%
\dimen0 = #1\relax
\advance\dimen0 by \voffset
%
\dimen2 = \hsize
\advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
%
\internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
{\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
{\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
}}
% Set default to letter.
%
\letterpaper
\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
\def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment
% DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice.
\catcode`\^^? = 14
% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
\catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"}
\catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
\catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+}
\catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<}
\catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>}
\catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^}
\catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_}
\catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|}
\catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~}
% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
%
% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
%
\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
% this is not a problem.
\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
% Turn off all special characters except @
% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
\catcode`\"=\active
\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
\let"=\activedoublequote
\catcode`\~=\active
\def~{{\tt\char126}}
\chardef\hat=`\^
\catcode`\^=\active
\def^{{\tt \hat}}
\catcode`\_=\active
\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
\let\realunder=_
% Subroutine for the previous macro.
\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
\catcode`\|=\active
\def|{{\tt\char124}}
\chardef \less=`\<
\catcode`\<=\active
\def<{{\tt \less}}
\chardef \gtr=`\>
\catcode`\>=\active
\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
\catcode`\+=\active
\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
\catcode`\$=\active
\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
% parsing them.
\def\turnoffactive{%
\normalturnoffactive
\otherbackslash
}
\catcode`\@=0
% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
% as in \char`\\.
\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work
% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}}
% In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
% in fixed width font.
\catcode`\\=\active % @ for escape char from now on.
% The story here is that in math mode, the \char of \backslashcurfont
% ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol font (because \char
% in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex sets
% \mathcode`\\="026E). It seems better for @backslashchar{} to always
% print a typewriter backslash, hence we use an explicit \mathchar,
% which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam;
% ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the
% usual hex value because it has already been made active.
@def@normalbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}}
@let@backslashchar = @normalbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents.
% On startup, @fixbackslash assigns:
% @let \ = @normalbackslash
% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
% catcode other. We switch back and forth between these.
@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
% the literal character `\'. Also revert - to its normal character, in
% case the active - from code has slipped in.
%
{@catcode`- = @active
@gdef@normalturnoffactive{%
@let-=@normaldash
@let"=@normaldoublequote
@let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
@let+=@normalplus
@let<=@normalless
@let>=@normalgreater
@let\=@normalbackslash
@let^=@normalcaret
@let_=@normalunderscore
@let|=@normalverticalbar
@let~=@normaltilde
@markupsetuplqdefault
@markupsetuprqdefault
@unsepspaces
}
}
% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
@otherifyactive
% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
% a backslash.
%
@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
@global@let\ = @eatinput
% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
% the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
%
@gdef@fixbackslash{%
@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
@catcode`+=@active
@catcode`@_=@active
}
% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
@escapechar = `@@
% These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need
% active definitions as the normal characters.
@def@normaldot{.}
@def@normalquest{?}
@def@normalslash{/}
% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
% @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line.
@catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&}
@catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#}
@catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%}
@let @hashchar = @normalhash
@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and
@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we
@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars.
@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments.
@catcode`@'=@active
@catcode`@`=@active
@markupsetuplqdefault
@markupsetuprqdefault
@c Local variables:
@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
@c time-stamp-end: "}"
@c End:
@c vim:sw=2:
@ignore
arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
@end ignore
libextractor-1.9/doc/libextractor.info 0000644 0001750 0001750 00000201502 13430046542 015133 0000000 0000000 This is libextractor.info, produced by makeinfo version 6.5 from
libextractor.texi.
This manual is for GNU libextractor (version 1.9, 20 June 2018), a
library for metadata extraction.
Copyright (C) 2007, 2010, 2012 Christian Grothoff
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software
Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and
no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".
INFO-DIR-SECTION Software libraries
START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
* Libextractor: (libextractor). Metadata extraction library.
END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
File: libextractor.info, Node: Top, Next: Introduction, Up: (dir)
The GNU libextractor Reference Manual
*************************************
This manual is for GNU libextractor (version 1.9, 20 June 2018), a
library for metadata extraction.
Copyright (C) 2007, 2010, 2012 Christian Grothoff
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software
Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and
no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".
* Menu:
* Introduction:: What is GNU libextractor.
* Preparation:: What you should do before using the library.
* Generalities:: General library functions and data types.
* Extracting meta data:: How to use GNU libextractor to obtain meta data.
* Language bindings:: How to use GNU libextractor from languages other than C.
* Utility functions:: Utility functions of GNU libextractor.
* Existing Plugins:: What plugins are available.
* Writing new Plugins:: How to write new plugins for GNU libextractor.
* Internal utility functions:: Utility functions of GNU libextractor for writing plugins.
* Reporting bugs:: How to report bugs or request new features.
Appendices
* GNU Free Documentation License:: Copying this manual.
Indices
* Index:: Index
File: libextractor.info, Node: Introduction, Next: Preparation, Prev: Top, Up: Top
1 Introduction
**************
GNU libextractor is GNU's library for extracting meta data from files.
Meta data includes format information (such as mime type, image
dimensions, color depth, recording frequency), content descriptions
(such as document title or document description) and copyright
information (such as license, author and contributors). Meta data
extraction is an inherently uncertain business -- a parse error can be a
corrupt file, an incompatibility in the file format version, an entirely
different file format or a bug in the parser. As a result of this
uncertainty, GNU libextractor deliberately avoids to ever report any
errors. Unexpected file contents simply result in less or possibly no
meta data being extracted.
GNU libextractor uses plugins to handle various file formats.
Technically a plugin can support multiple file formats; however, most
plugins only support one particular format. By default, GNU
libextractor will use all plugins that are available and found in the
plugin installation directory. Applications can request the use of only
specific plugins or the exclusion of certain plugins.
GNU libextractor is distributed with the 'extract' command(1) which
is a command-line tool for extracting meta data. 'extract' is given a
list of filenames and prints the resulting meta data to the console.
The 'extract' source code also serves as an advanced example for how to
use GNU libextractor.
This manual focuses on providing documentation for writing software
with GNU libextractor. The only relevant parts for end-users are the
chapter on compiling and installing GNU libextractor (*Note
Preparation::.). Also, the chapter on existing plugins maybe of
interest (*Note Existing Plugins::.). Additional documentation for
end-users can be find in the man page on 'extract' (using man extract).
GNU libextractor is licensed under the GNU General Public License,
specifically, since version 0.7, GNU libextractor is licensed under
GPLv3 _or any later version_.
---------- Footnotes ----------
(1) Some distributions ship 'extract' in a seperate package.
File: libextractor.info, Node: Preparation, Next: Generalities, Prev: Introduction, Up: Top
2 Preparation
*************
This chapter first describes the general build instructions that should
apply to all systems. Specific instructions for known problems for
particular platforms are then described in individual sections
afterwards.
Compiling GNU libextractor follows the standard GNU autotools build
process using 'configure' and 'make'. For details on the GNU autotools
build process, read the 'INSTALL' file and query ./configure --help for
additional options.
GNU libextractor has various dependencies, most of which are
optional. Instead of specifying the names of the software packages, we
will give the list in terms of the names of the respective Debian
(wheezy) packages that should be installed.
You absolutely need:
* libtool
* gcc
* make
* g++
* libltdl7-dev
Recommended dependencies are:
* zlib1g-dev
* libbz2-dev
* libgif-dev
* libvorbis-dev
* libflac-dev
* libmpeg2-4-dev
* librpm-dev
* libgtk2.0-dev or libgtk3.0-dev
* libgsf-1-dev
* libqt4-dev
* libpoppler-dev
* libexiv2-dev
* libavformat-dev
* libswscale-dev
* libgstreamer1.0-dev
For Subversion access and compilation one also needs:
* subversion
* autoconf
* automake
Please notify us if we missed some dependencies (note that the list
is supposed to only list direct dependencies, not transitive
dependencies).
Once you have compiled and installed GNU libextractor, you should
have a file 'extractor.h' installed in your 'include/' directory. This
file should be the starting point for your C and C++ development with
GNU libextractor. The build process also installs the 'extract' binary
and man pages for 'extract' and GNU libextractor. The 'extract' man
page documents the 'extract' tool. The GNU libextractor man page gives
a brief summary of the C API for GNU libextractor.
When you install GNU libextractor, various plugins will be installed
in the 'lib/libextractor/' directory. The main library will be
installed as 'lib/libextractor.so'. Note that GNU libextractor will
attempt to find the plugins relative to the path of the main library.
Consequently, a package manager can move the library and its plugins to
a different location later -- as long as the relative path between the
main library and the plugins is preserved. As a method of last resort,
the user can specify an environment variable LIBEXTRACTOR_PREFIX. If
GNU libextractor cannot locate a plugin, it will look in
LIBEXTRACTOR_PREFIX/lib/libextractor/.
2.1 Installation on GNU/Linux
=============================
Should work using the standard instructions without problems.
2.2 Installation on FreeBSD
===========================
Should work using the standard instructions without problems.
2.3 Installation on OpenBSD
===========================
OpenBSD 3.8 also doesn't have CODESET in 'langinfo.h'. CODESET is used
in GNU libextractor in about three places. This causes problems during
compilation.
2.4 Installation on NetBSD
==========================
No reports so far.
2.5 Installation using MinGW
============================
Linking -lstdc++ with the provided libtool fails on Cygwin, this is a
problem with libtool, there is unfortunately no flag to tell libtool how
to do its job on Cygwin and it seems that it cannot be the default to
set the library check to 'pass_all'. Patching libtool may help.
Note: this is a rather dated report and may no longer apply.
2.6 Installation on OS X
========================
libextractor has two installation methods on Mac OS X: it can be
installed as a Mac OS X framework or with the standard './configure;
make; make install' shell commands. The framework package is
self-contained, but currently omits some of the extractor plugins that
can be compiled in if libextractor is installed with './configure; make;
make install' (provided that the required dependencies exist.)
2.6.1 Installing and uninstalling the framework
-----------------------------------------------
The binary framework is distributed as a disk image
('Extractor-x.x.xx.dmg'). Installation is done by opening the disk
image and clicking 'Extractor.pkg' inside it. The Mac OS X installer
application will then run. The framework is installed to the root
volume's '/Library/Frameworks' folder and installing will require admin
privileges.
The framework can be uninstalled by dragging
'/Library/Frameworks/Extractor.framework' to the 'Trash'.
2.6.2 Using the framework
-------------------------
In the framework, the 'extract' command line tool can be found at
'/Library/Frameworks/Extractor.framework/Versions/Current/bin/extract'
The framework can be used in software projects as a framework or as a
dynamic library.
When using the framework as a dynamic library in projects using
autotools, one would most likely want to add
"-I/Library/Frameworks/Extractor.framework/Versions/Current/include" to
CPPFLAGS and
"-L/Library/Frameworks/Extractor.framework/Versions/Current/lib" to
LDFLAGS.
2.6.3 Example for using the framework
-------------------------------------
// hello.c
#include
int
main (int argc, char **argv)
{
struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *el;
el = EXTRACTOR_plugin_load_defaults (EXTRACTOR_OPTION_DEFAULT_POLICY);
// ...
EXTRACTOR_plugin_remove_all (el);
return 0;
}
You can then compile the example using
$ gcc -o hello hello.c -framework Extractor
2.6.4 Example for using the dynamic library
-------------------------------------------
// hello.c
#include
int main()
{
struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *el;
el = EXTRACTOR_plugin_load_defaults (EXTRACTOR_OPTION_DEFAULT_POLICY);
// ...
EXTRACTOR_plugin_remove_all (el);
return 0;
}
You can then compile the example using
$ gcc -I/Library/Frameworks/Extractor.framework/Versions/Current/include \
-o hello hello.c \
-L/Library/Frameworks/Extractor.framework/Versions/Current/lib \
-lextractor
Notice the difference in the '#include' line.
2.7 Note to package maintainers
===============================
The suggested way to package GNU libextractor is to split it into
roughly the following binary packages:
* libextractor (main library only, only hard dependency for other
packages depending on GNU libextractor)
* extract (command-line tool and man page extract.1)
* libextractor-dev (extractor.h header and man page libextractor.3)
* libextractor-doc (this manual)
* libextractor-plugins (plugins without external dependencies;
recommended but not required by extract and libextractor package)
* libextractor-plugin-XXX (plugin with dependency on libXXX, for
example for XXX=mpeg this would be 'libextractor_mpeg.so')
* libextractor-plugins-all (meta package that requires all plugins
except experimental plugins)
This would enable minimal installations (i.e. for embedded systems)
to not include any plugins, as well as moderate-size installations (that
do not trigger GTK and X11) for systems that have limited resources.
Right now, the MP4 plugin is experimental and does nothing and should
thus never be included at all. The gstreamer plugin is experimental but
largely works with the correct version of gstreamer and can thus be
packaged (especially if the dependency is available on the target
system) but should probably not be part of libextractor-plugins-all.
File: libextractor.info, Node: Generalities, Next: Extracting meta data, Prev: Preparation, Up: Top
3 Generalities
**************
3.1 Introduction to the "extract" command
=========================================
The 'extract' command takes a list of file names as arguments, extracts
meta data from each of those files and prints the result to the console.
By default, 'extract' will use all available plugins and print all
(non-binary) meta data that is found.
The set of plugins used by 'extract' can be controlled using the "-l"
and "-n" options. Use "-n" to not load all of the default plugins. Use
"-l NAME" to specifically load a certain plugin. For example, specify
"-n -l mime" to only use the MIME plugin.
Using the "-p" option the output of 'extract' can be limited to only
certain keyword types. Similarly, using the "-x" option, certain
keyword types can be excluded. A list of all known keyword types can be
obtained using the "-L" option.
The output format of 'extract' can be influenced with the "-V" (more
verbose, lists filenames), "-g" (grep-friendly, all meta data on a
single line per file) and "-b" (bibTeX style) options.
3.2 Common usage examples for "extract"
=======================================
$ extract test/test.jpg
comment - (C) 2001 by Christian Grothoff, using gimp 1.2 1
mimetype - image/jpeg
$ extract -V -x comment test/test.jpg
Keywords for file test/test.jpg:
mimetype - image/jpeg
$ extract -p comment test/test.jpg
comment - (C) 2001 by Christian Grothoff, using gimp 1.2 1
$ extract -nV -l png.so -p comment test/test.jpg test/test.png
Keywords for file test/test.jpg:
Keywords for file test/test.png:
comment - Testing keyword extraction
3.3 Introduction to the libextractor library
============================================
Each public symbol exported by GNU libextractor has the prefix
EXTRACTOR_. All-caps names are used for constants. For the impatient,
the minimal C code for using GNU libextractor (on the executing binary
itself) looks like this:
#include
int
main (int argc, char ** argv)
{
struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *plugins
= EXTRACTOR_plugin_add_defaults (EXTRACTOR_OPTION_DEFAULT_POLICY);
EXTRACTOR_extract (plugins, argv[1],
NULL, 0,
&EXTRACTOR_meta_data_print, stdout);
EXTRACTOR_plugin_remove_all (plugins);
return 0;
}
The minimal API illustrated by this example is actually sufficient
for many applications. The full external C API of GNU libextractor is
described in chapter *Note Extracting meta data::. Bindings for other
languages are described in chapter *Note Language bindings::. The API
for writing new plugins is described in chapter *Note Writing new
Plugins::.
Note that it is possible for GNU libextractor to encounter a
'SIGPIPE' during its execution. GNU libextractor -- as it is a library
and as such should not interfere with your main application -- does NOT
install a signal handler for 'SIGPIPE'. You thus need to install a
signal handler (or at least tell your system to ignore 'SIGPIPE') if you
want to avoid unexpected problems during calls to GNU libextractor.
File: libextractor.info, Node: Extracting meta data, Next: Language bindings, Prev: Generalities, Up: Top
4 Extracting meta data
**********************
In order to extract meta data with GNU libextractor you first need to
load the respective plugins and then call the extraction API with the
plugins and the data to process. This section documents how to load and
unload plugins, the various types and formats in which meta data is
returned to the application and finally the extraction API itself.
* Menu:
* Plugin management:: How to load and unload plugins
* Meta types:: About meta types
* Meta formats:: About meta formats
* Extracting:: How to use the extraction API
File: libextractor.info, Node: Plugin management, Next: Meta types, Up: Extracting meta data
4.1 Plugin management
=====================
Using GNU libextractor from a multi-threaded parent process requires
some care. The problem is that on most platforms GNU libextractor
starts sub-processes for the actual extraction work. This is useful to
isolate the parent process from potential bugs; however, it can cause
problems if the parent process is multi-threaded. The issue is that at
the time of the fork, another thread of the application may hold a lock
(i.e. in gettext or libc). That lock would then never be released in
the child process (as the other thread is not present in the child
process). As a result, the child process would then deadlock on trying
to acquire the lock and never terminate. This has actually been
observed with a lock in GNU gettext that is triggered by the plugin
startup code when it interacts with libltdl.
The problem can be solved by loading the plugins using the
'EXTRACTOR_OPTION_IN_PROCESS' option, which will run GNU libextractor
in-process and thus avoid the locking issue. In this case, all of the
functions for loading and unloading plugins, including
EXTRACTOR_plugin_add_defaults and EXTRACTOR_plugin_remove_all, are
thread-safe and reentrant. However, using the same plugin list from
multiple threads at the same time is not safe.
All plugin code is expected required to be reentrant and state-less,
but due to the extensive use of 3rd party libraries this cannot be
guaranteed.
-- C Struct: EXTRACTOR_PluginList
A plugin list represents a set of GNU libextractor plugins. Most
of the GNU libextractor API is concerned with either constructing a
plugin list or using it to extract meta data. The internal
representation of the plugin list is of no concern to users or
plugin developers.
-- Function: void EXTRACTOR_plugin_remove_all (struct
EXTRACTOR_PluginList *plugins)
Unload all of the plugins in the given list.
-- Function: struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList * EXTRACTOR_plugin_remove
(struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *plugins, const char*name)
Unloads a particular plugin. The given name should be the short
name of the plugin, for example "mime" for the mime-type extractor
or "mpeg" for the MPEG extractor.
-- Function: struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList * EXTRACTOR_plugin_add (struct
EXTRACTOR_PluginList *plugins, const char* name,const char*
options, enum EXTRACTOR_Options flags)
Loads a particular plugin. The plugin is added to the existing
list, which can be 'NULL'. The second argument specifies the name
of the plugin (i.e. "ogg"). The third argument can be 'NULL' and
specifies plugin-specific options. Finally, the last argument
specifies if the plugin should be executed out-of-process
('EXTRACTOR_OPTION_DEFAULT_POLICY') or not.
-- Function: struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList * EXTRACTOR_plugin_add_config
(struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *plugins, const char* config,
enum EXTRACTOR_Options flags)
Loads and unloads plugins based on a configuration string,
modifying the existing list, which can be 'NULL'. The string has
the format "[-]NAME(OPTIONS){:[-]NAME(OPTIONS)}*". Prefixing the
plugin name with a "-" means that the plugin should be unloaded.
-- Function: struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *
EXTRACTOR_plugin_add_defaults (enum EXTRACTOR_Options flags)
Loads all of the plugins in the plugin directory. This function is
what most GNU libextractor applications should use to setup the
plugins.
File: libextractor.info, Node: Meta types, Next: Meta formats, Prev: Plugin management, Up: Extracting meta data
4.2 Meta types
==============
enum EXTRACTOR_MetaType is a C enum which defines a list of over 100
different types of meta data. The total number can differ between
different GNU libextractor releases; the maximum value for the current
release can be obtained using the EXTRACTOR_metatype_get_max function.
All values in this enumeration are of the form EXTRACTOR_METATYPE_XXX.
-- Function: const char * EXTRACTOR_metatype_to_string (enum
EXTRACTOR_MetaType type)
The function EXTRACTOR_metatype_to_string can be used to obtain a
short English string 's' describing the meta data type. The string
can be translated into other languages using GNU gettext with the
domain set to GNU libextractor (dgettext("libextractor", s)).
-- Function: const char * EXTRACTOR_metatype_to_description (enum
EXTRACTOR_MetaType type)
The function EXTRACTOR_metatype_to_description can be used to
obtain a longer English string 's' describing the meta data type.
The description may be empty if the short description returned by
'EXTRACTOR_metatype_to_string' is already comprehensive. The
string can be translated into other languages using GNU gettext
with the domain set to GNU libextractor
(dgettext("libextractor", s)).
File: libextractor.info, Node: Meta formats, Next: Extracting, Prev: Meta types, Up: Extracting meta data
4.3 Meta formats
================
enum EXTRACTOR_MetaFormat is a C enum which defines on a high level how
the extracted meta data is represented. Currently, the library uses
three formats: UTF-8 strings, C strings and binary data. A fourth
value, 'EXTRACTOR_METAFORMAT_UNKNOWN' is defined but not used. UTF-8
strings are 0-terminated strings that have been converted to UTF-8. The
format code is 'EXTRACTOR_METAFORMAT_UTF8'. Ideally, most text meta
data will be of this format. Some file formats fail to specify the
encoding used for the text. In this case, the text cannot be converted
to UTF-8. However, the meta data is still known to be 0-terminated and
presumably human-readable. In this case, the format code used is
'EXTRACTOR_METAFORMAT_C_STRING'; however, this should not be understood
to mean that the encoding is the same as that used by the C compiler.
Finally, for binary data (mostly images), the format
'EXTRACTOR_METAFORMAT_BINARY' is used.
Naturally this is not a precise description of the meta format.
Plugins can provide a more precise description (if known) by providing
the respective mime type of the meta data. For example, binary image
meta data could be also tagged as "image/png" and normal text would
typically be tagged as "text/plain".
File: libextractor.info, Node: Extracting, Prev: Meta formats, Up: Extracting meta data
4.4 Extracting
==============
-- Function Pointer: int (*EXTRACTOR_MetaDataProcessor)(void *cls,
const char *plugin_name, enum EXTRACTOR_MetaType type, enum
EXTRACTOR_MetaFormat format, const char *data_mime_type, const
char *data, size_t data_len)
Type of a function that libextractor calls for each meta data item
found.
CLS
closure (user-defined)
PLUGIN_NAME
name of the plugin that produced this value; special values
can be used (i.e. '' for zlib being used in the main
libextractor library and yielding meta data);
TYPE
libextractor-type describing the meta data;
FORMAT BASIC
format information about data
DATA_MIME_TYPE
mime-type of data (not of the original file); can be 'NULL'
(if mime-type is not known);
DATA
actual meta-data found
DATA_LEN
number of bytes in data
Return 0 to continue extracting, 1 to abort.
-- Function: void EXTRACTOR_extract (struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList
*plugins, const char *filename, const void *data, size_t size,
EXTRACTOR_MetaDataProcessor proc, void *proc_cls)
This is the main function for extracting keywords with GNU
libextractor. The first argument is a plugin list which specifies
the set of plugins that should be used for extracting meta data.
The 'filename' argument is optional and can be used to specify the
name of a file to process. If 'filename' is 'NULL', then the
'data' argument must point to the in-memory data to extract meta
data from. If 'filename' is non-'NULL', 'data' can be 'NULL'. If
'data' is non-null, then 'size' is the size of 'data' in bytes.
Otherwise 'size' should be zero. For each meta data item found,
GNU libextractor will call the 'proc' function, passing 'proc_cls'
as the first argument to 'proc'. The other arguments to 'proc'
depend on the specific meta data found.
Meta data extraction should never really fail -- at worst, GNU
libextractor should not call 'proc' with any meta data. By design,
GNU libextractor should never crash or leak memory, even given
corrupt files as input. Note however, that running GNU
libextractor on a corrupt file system (or incorrectly mmaped files)
can result in the operating system sending a SIGBUS (bus error) to
the process. As GNU libextractor typically runs plugins
out-of-process, it first maps the file into memory and then
attempts to decompress it. During decompression it is possible to
encounter a SIGBUS. GNU libextractor will _not_ attempt to catch
this signal and your application is likely to crash. Note again
that this should only happen if the file _system_ is corrupt (not
if individual files are corrupt). If this is not acceptable, you
might want to consider running GNU libextractor itself also
out-of-process (as done, for example, by doodle
(http://grothoff.org/christian/doodle/)).
File: libextractor.info, Node: Language bindings, Next: Utility functions, Prev: Extracting meta data, Up: Top
5 Language bindings
*******************
GNU libextractor works immediately with C and C++ code. Bindings for
Java, Mono, Ruby, Perl, PHP and Python are available for download from
the main GNU libextractor website. Documentation for these bindings (if
available) is part of the downloads for the respective binding. In all
cases, a full installation of the C library is required before the
binding can be installed.
5.1 Java
========
Compiling the GNU libextractor Java binding follows the usual process of
running 'configure' and 'make'. The result will be a shared C library
'libextractor_java.so' with the native code and a JAR file (installed to
'$PREFIX/share/java/libextractor.java').
A minimal example for using GNU libextractor's Java binding would
look like this:
import org.gnu.libextractor.*;
import java.util.ArrayList;
public static void main(String[] args) {
Extractor ex = Extractor.getDefault();
for (int i=0;iread (ec->cls, &data, 4)))
return; /* read error */
if (data_size < 4)
return; /* file too small */
if (0 != memcmp (data, "\177ELF", 4))
return; /* not ELF */
if (0 != ec->proc (ec->cls,
"mymime",
EXTRACTOR_METATYPE_MIMETYPE,
EXTRACTOR_METAFORMAT_UTF8,
"text/plain",
"application/x-executable",
1 + strlen("application/x-executable")))
return;
/* more calls to 'proc' here as needed */
}
File: libextractor.info, Node: Internal utility functions, Next: Reporting bugs, Prev: Writing new Plugins, Up: Top
9 Internal utility functions
****************************
Some plugins link against the 'libextractor_common' library which
provides common abstractions needed by many plugins. This section
documents this internal API for plugin developers. Note that the
headers for this library are (intentionally) not installed: we do not
consider this API stable and it should hence only be used by plugins
that are build and shipped with GNU libextractor. Third-party plugins
should not use it.
'convert_numeric.h' defines various conversion functions for numbers
(in particular, byte-order conversion for floating point numbers).
'unzip.h' defines an API for accessing compressed files.
'pack.h' provides an interpreter for unpacking structs of integer
numbers from streams and converting from big or little endian to host
byte order at the same time.
'convert.h' provides a function for character set conversion
described below.
-- Function: char * EXTRACTOR_common_convert_to_utf8 (const char
*input, size_t len, const char *charset)
Various GNU libextractor plugins make use of the internal
'convert.h' header which defines a function
EXTRACTOR_common_convert_to_utf8 which can be used to easily
convert text from any character set to UTF-8. This conversion is
important since the linked list of keywords that is returned by GNU
libextractor is expected to contain only UTF-8 strings. Naturally,
proper conversion may not always be possible since some file
formats fail to specify the character set. In that case, it is
often better to not convert at all.
The arguments to EXTRACTOR_common_convert_to_utf8 are the input
string (which does _not_ have to be zero-terminated), the length of
the input string, and the character set (which _must_ be
zero-terminated). Which character sets are supported depends on
the platform, a list can generally be obtained using the 'iconv -l'
command. The return value from EXTRACTOR_common_convert_to_utf8 is
a zero-terminated string in UTF-8 format. The responsibility to
free the string is with the caller, so storing the string in the
keyword list is acceptable.
File: libextractor.info, Node: Reporting bugs, Next: GNU Free Documentation License, Prev: Internal utility functions, Up: Top
10 Reporting bugs
*****************
GNU libextractor uses the Mantis bugtracking system
(https://gnunet.org/bugs/). If possible, please report bugs there. You
can also e-mail the GNU libextractor mailinglist at
.
File: libextractor.info, Node: GNU Free Documentation License, Next: Index, Prev: Reporting bugs, Up: Top
Appendix A GNU Free Documentation License
*****************************************
Version 1.3, 3 November 2008
Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
0. PREAMBLE
The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
functional and useful document "free" in the sense of freedom: to
assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
with or without modifying it, either commercially or
noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the
author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not
being considered responsible for modifications made by others.
This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
license designed for free software.
We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms
that the software does. But this License is not limited to
software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless
of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We
recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is
instruction or reference.
1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium,
that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can
be distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice
grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration,
to use that work under the conditions stated herein. The
"Document", below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member
of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as "you". You accept
the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a way
requiring permission under copyright law.
A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
modifications and/or translated into another language.
A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section
of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall
subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could
fall directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document
is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not
explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of
historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or
of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position
regarding them.
The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose
titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the
notice that says that the Document is released under this License.
If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it
is not allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may
contain zero Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify
any Invariant Sections then there are none.
The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are
listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
that says that the Document is released under this License. A
Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may
be at most 25 words.
A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
represented in a format whose specification is available to the
general public, that is suitable for revising the document
straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed
of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely
available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text
formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats
suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise
Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of markup, has
been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by
readers is not Transparent. An image format is not Transparent if
used for any substantial amount of text. A copy that is not
"Transparent" is called "Opaque".
Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming
simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification.
Examples of transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG.
Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and
edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which
the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and
the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word
processors for output purposes only.
The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
material this License requires to appear in the title page. For
works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title
Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
The "publisher" means any person or entity that distributes copies
of the Document to the public.
A section "Entitled XYZ" means a named subunit of the Document
whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses
following text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ
stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as
"Acknowledgements", "Dedications", "Endorsements", or "History".)
To "Preserve the Title" of such a section when you modify the
Document means that it remains a section "Entitled XYZ" according
to this definition.
The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice
which states that this License applies to the Document. These
Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in
this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and
has no effect on the meaning of this License.
2. VERBATIM COPYING
You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you
add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You
may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading
or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However,
you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you
distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the
conditions in section 3.
You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
and you may publicly display copies.
3. COPYING IN QUANTITY
If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly
have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and
the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must
enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all
these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly
and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The
front cover must present the full title with all words of the title
equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the
covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as
long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these
conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects.
If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
adjacent pages.
If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document
numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable
Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with
each Opaque copy a computer-network location from which the general
network-using public has access to download using public-standard
network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free
of added material. If you use the latter option, you must take
reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque
copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will
remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one
year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or
through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.
It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies,
to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the
Document.
4. MODIFICATIONS
You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document
under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you
release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the
Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing
distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever
possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in
the Modified Version:
A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous
versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the
History section of the Document). You may use the same title
as a previous version if the original publisher of that
version gives permission.
B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or
entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in
the Modified Version, together with at least five of the
principal authors of the Document (all of its principal
authors, if it has fewer than five), unless they release you
from this requirement.
C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
Modified Version, as the publisher.
D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
adjacent to the other copyright notices.
F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license
notice giving the public permission to use the Modified
Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in
the Addendum below.
G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's
license notice.
H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
I. Preserve the section Entitled "History", Preserve its Title,
and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new
authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the
Title Page. If there is no section Entitled "History" in the
Document, create one stating the title, year, authors, and
publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add
an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the
previous sentence.
J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document
for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and
likewise the network locations given in the Document for
previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in the
"History" section. You may omit a network location for a work
that was published at least four years before the Document
itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers
to gives permission.
K. For any section Entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section
all the substance and tone of each of the contributor
acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein.
L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered
in their text and in their titles. Section numbers or the
equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
M. Delete any section Entitled "Endorsements". Such a section
may not be included in the Modified Version.
N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled
"Endorsements" or to conflict in title with any Invariant
Section.
O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate
some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their
titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's
license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other
section titles.
You may add a section Entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text
has been approved by an organization as the authoritative
definition of a standard.
You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of
the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage
of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document
already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added
by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on
behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old
one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added
the old one.
The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
You may combine the Document with other documents released under
this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for
modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all
of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents,
unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your
combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all
their Warranty Disclaimers.
The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
but different contents, make the title of each such section unique
by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the
original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a
unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in
the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the
combined work.
In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled
"History" in the various original documents, forming one section
Entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections Entitled
"Acknowledgements", and any sections Entitled "Dedications". You
must delete all sections Entitled "Endorsements."
6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
documents released under this License, and replace the individual
copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents
in all other respects.
You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert
a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this
License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that
document.
7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a
storage or distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the
copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the
legal rights of the compilation's users beyond what the individual
works permit. When the Document is included in an aggregate, this
License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which
are not themselves derivative works of the Document.
If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half
of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed
on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic
form. Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket
the whole aggregate.
8. TRANSLATION
Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section
4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a
translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also
include the original English version of this License and the
original versions of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a
disagreement between the translation and the original version of
this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will
prevail.
If a section in the Document is Entitled "Acknowledgements",
"Dedications", or "History", the requirement (section 4) to
Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the
actual title.
9. TERMINATION
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void,
and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your
license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and
finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the
copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some
reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from
that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days
after your receipt of the notice.
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate
the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you
under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not
permanently reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the
same material does not give you any rights to use it.
10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new
versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See
.
Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you
have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
that specified version or of any later version that has been
published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the
Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may
choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free
Software Foundation. If the Document specifies that a proxy can
decide which future versions of this License can be used, that
proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently
authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.
11. RELICENSING
"Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site" (or "MMC Site") means any
World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also
provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works. A
public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server.
A "Massive Multiauthor Collaboration" (or "MMC") contained in the
site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC
site.
"CC-BY-SA" means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0
license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit
corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco,
California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license
published by that same organization.
"Incorporate" means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or
in part, as part of another Document.
An MMC is "eligible for relicensing" if it is licensed under this
License, and if all works that were first published under this
License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently
incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover
texts or invariant sections, and (2) were thus incorporated prior
to November 1, 2008.
The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the
site under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1,
2009, provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.
ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
====================================================
To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
the License in the document and put the following copyright and license
notices just after the title page:
Copyright (C) YEAR YOUR NAME.
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover
Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
Free Documentation License''.
If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover
Texts, replace the "with...Texts." line with this:
with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with
the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts
being LIST.
If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
situation.
If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free
software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit
their use in free software.
File: libextractor.info, Node: Index, Prev: GNU Free Documentation License, Up: Top
Index
*****
[index ]
* Menu:
* (*EXTRACTOR_MetaDataProcessor)(void: Extracting. (line 6)
* bug: Reporting bugs. (line 6)
* bus error: Extracting. (line 57)
* character set: Internal utility functions.
(line 28)
* concurrency: Plugin management. (line 6)
* concurrency <1>: Extracting. (line 43)
* concurrency <2>: Utility functions. (line 6)
* directory structure: Preparation. (line 63)
* enum EXTRACTOR_MetaFormat: Meta formats. (line 6)
* enum EXTRACTOR_MetaType: Meta types. (line 6)
* enum EXTRACTOR_Options: Plugin management. (line 6)
* environment variables: Preparation. (line 63)
* error handling: Introduction. (line 6)
* EXTRACTOR_common_convert_to_utf8: Internal utility functions.
(line 26)
* EXTRACTOR_common_convert_to_utf8 <1>: Internal utility functions.
(line 28)
* EXTRACTOR_extract: Extracting. (line 40)
* EXTRACTOR_extract <1>: Extracting. (line 43)
* EXTRACTOR_MetaDataProcessor: Extracting. (line 10)
* EXTRACTOR_metatype_get_max: Meta types. (line 6)
* EXTRACTOR_metatype_to_description: Meta types. (line 20)
* EXTRACTOR_metatype_to_description <1>: Meta types. (line 22)
* EXTRACTOR_metatype_to_string: Meta types. (line 12)
* EXTRACTOR_metatype_to_string <1>: Meta types. (line 14)
* EXTRACTOR_meta_data_print: Meta data printing. (line 6)
* EXTRACTOR_PluginList: Plugin management. (line 31)
* EXTRACTOR_plugin_add: Plugin management. (line 51)
* EXTRACTOR_plugin_add <1>: Plugin management. (line 54)
* EXTRACTOR_plugin_add_config: Plugin management. (line 62)
* EXTRACTOR_plugin_add_config <1>: Plugin management. (line 65)
* EXTRACTOR_plugin_add_defaults: Plugin management. (line 71)
* EXTRACTOR_plugin_add_defaults <1>: Plugin management. (line 73)
* EXTRACTOR_plugin_remove: Plugin management. (line 44)
* EXTRACTOR_plugin_remove <1>: Plugin management. (line 46)
* EXTRACTOR_plugin_remove_all: Plugin management. (line 39)
* EXTRACTOR_plugin_remove_all <1>: Plugin management. (line 41)
* EXTRACTOR_VERSION: Utility Constants. (line 6)
* gettext: Meta types. (line 14)
* gettext <1>: Meta types. (line 22)
* internationalization: Meta types. (line 14)
* internationalization <1>: Meta types. (line 22)
* Java: Language bindings. (line 6)
* LIBEXTRACTOR_PREFIX: Preparation. (line 63)
* license: Introduction. (line 38)
* Mono: Language bindings. (line 6)
* packageing: Preparation. (line 63)
* Perl: Language bindings. (line 6)
* PHP: Language bindings. (line 6)
* plugin: Introduction. (line 18)
* plugin <1>: Preparation. (line 63)
* Python: Language bindings. (line 6)
* reentrant: Plugin management. (line 6)
* reentrant <1>: Extracting. (line 43)
* reentrant <2>: Utility functions. (line 6)
* Ruby: Language bindings. (line 6)
* SIGBUS: Extracting. (line 57)
* SIGPIPE: Generalities. (line 81)
* struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList: Plugin management. (line 32)
* thread-safety: Plugin management. (line 6)
* thread-safety <1>: Extracting. (line 43)
* thread-safety <2>: Utility functions. (line 6)
* threads: Plugin management. (line 6)
* threads <1>: Extracting. (line 43)
* threads <2>: Utility functions. (line 6)
* UTF-8: Internal utility functions.
(line 28)
Tag Table:
Node: Top780
Node: Introduction2378
Ref: Introduction-Footnote-14525
Node: Preparation4590
Node: Generalities12189
Node: Extracting meta data15423
Node: Plugin management16135
Node: Meta types19806
Node: Meta formats21218
Node: Extracting22613
Node: Language bindings25804
Node: Utility functions27702
Node: Utility Constants28027
Node: Meta data printing28646
Node: Existing Plugins29187
Node: Writing new Plugins30198
Node: Internal utility functions32829
Node: Reporting bugs35176
Node: GNU Free Documentation License35549
Node: Index60704
End Tag Table
libextractor-1.9/doc/version.texi 0000644 0001750 0001750 00000000131 13430046036 014125 0000000 0000000 @set UPDATED 20 June 2018
@set UPDATED-MONTH June 2018
@set EDITION 1.9
@set VERSION 1.9
libextractor-1.9/doc/libextractor.3 0000644 0001750 0001750 00000007417 13312531357 014355 0000000 0000000 .TH LIBEXTRACTOR 3 "Sept 4, 2012" "GNU libextractor 1.0.0"
.SH NAME
libextractor \- meta\-information extraction library 1.0.0
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fB#include
\fBconst char *EXTRACTOR_metatype_to_string (enum EXTRACTOR_MetaType \fItype\fB);
\fBconst char *EXTRACTOR_metatype_to_description (enum EXTRACTOR_MetaType \fItype\fB);
\fBenum EXTRACTOR_MetaTypeEXTRACTOR_metatype_get_max (void);
\fBstruct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *EXTRACTOR_plugin_add_defaults (enum EXTRACTOR_Options \fIflags\fB);
\fBstruct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *EXTRACTOR_plugin_add (struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *\fIprev\fB, const char *\fIlibrary\fB, const char *\fIoptions\fB, enum EXTRACTOR_Options \fIflags\fB);
\fBstruct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *EXTRACTOR_plugin_add_last (struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *\fIprev\fB, const char *\fIlibrary\fB, const char *\fIoptions\fB, enum EXTRACTOR_Options \fIflags\fB);
\fBstruct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *EXTRACTOR_plugin_add_config (struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *\fIprev\fB, const char *\fIconfig\fB, enum EXTRACTOR_Options \fIflags\fB);
\fBstruct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *EXTRACTOR_plugin_remove (struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *\fIprev\fB, const char *\fIlibrary\fB);
\fBvoid EXTRACTOR_plugin_remove_all (struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *\fIplugins\fB);
\fBvoid EXTRACTOR_extract (struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *\fIplugins\fB, const char *\fIfilename\fB, const void *\fIdata\fB, size_t \fIsize\fB, EXTRACTOR_MetaDataProcessor \fIproc\fB, void *\fIproc_cls\fB);
\fBint EXTRACTOR_meta_data_prin t(void *\fIhandle\fB, const char *\fIplugin_name\fB, enum EXTRACTOR_MetaType \fItype\fB, enum EXTRACTOR_MetaFormat \fIformat\fB, const char *\fIdata_mime_type\fB, const char *\fIdata\fB, size_t \fIdata_len\fB);
\fBEXTRACTOR_VERSION
.SH DESCRIPTION
.P
GNU libextractor is a simple library for keyword extraction. libextractor does not support all formats but supports a simple plugging mechanism such that you can quickly add extractors for additional formats, even without recompiling libextractor. libextractor typically ships with dozens of plugins that can be used to obtain meta data from common file-types. If you want to write your own plugin for some filetype, all you need to do is write a little library that implements a single method with this signature:
\fBvoid EXTRACTOR_XXX_extract_method (struct EXTRACTOR_ExtractContext *\fIec\fB);\fP
.P
\fIec\fP contains function pointers for reading, seeking, getting the overall file size and returning meta data. There is also a field with options for the plugin. New plugins will be automatically located and used once they are installed in the respective directory (typically something like /usr/lib/libextractor/).
.P
The application \fBextract\fP gives an example how to use libextractor.
.P
The basic use of libextractor is to load the plugins (for example with \fBEXTRACTOR_plugin_add_defaults\fP), then to extract the keyword list using \fBEXTRACTOR_extract\fP, and finally unloading the plugins (with \fBEXTRACTOR_plugin_remove_all\fP).
.P
Textual meta data obtained from libextractor is supposed to be UTF-8 encoded if the text encoding is known. Plugins are supposed to convert meta\-data to UTF\-8 if necessary. The \fBEXTRACTOR_meta_data_print\fP function converts the UTF-8 keywords to the character set from the current locale before printing them.
.P
.SH "SEE ALSO"
extract(1)
.SH "LEGAL NOTICE"
libextractor is released under the GPL and a GNU package (http://www.gnu.org/).
.SH BUGS
A couple of file-formats (on the order of 10^3) are not recognized...
.SH AUTHORS
extract was originally written by Christian Grothoff and Vidyut Samanta . Use to contact the current maintainer(s).
.SH AVAILABILITY
You can obtain the original author's latest version from http://www.gnu.org/software/libextractor/.
libextractor-1.9/doc/gpl.texi 0000644 0001750 0001750 00000043643 13312531357 013245 0000000 0000000 @node Copying
@appendix GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
@cindex GPL, GNU General Public License
@center Version 2, June 1991
@display
Copyright @copyright{} 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
@end display
@appendixsubsec Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
software---to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
modification follow.
@iftex
@appendixsubsec TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
@end iftex
@ifinfo
@center TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
@end ifinfo
@enumerate
@item
This License applies to any program or other work which contains
a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
under the terms of this General Public License. The ``Program'', below,
refers to any such program or work, and a ``work based on the Program''
means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
the term ``modification''.) Each licensee is addressed as ``you''.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
@item
You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
@item
You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
@enumerate a
@item
You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
@item
You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
parties under the terms of this License.
@item
If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
@end enumerate
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
the scope of this License.
@item
You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
@enumerate a
@item
Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
@item
Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
customarily used for software interchange; or,
@item
Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
received the program in object code or executable form with such
an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
@end enumerate
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
special exception, the source code distributed need not include
anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
@item
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
parties remain in full compliance.
@item
You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
the Program or works based on it.
@item
Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
this License.
@item
If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
be a consequence of the rest of this License.
@item
If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
@item
The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and ``any
later version'', you have the option of following the terms and conditions
either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.
@item
If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
@item
BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
PROVIDE THE PROGRAM ``AS IS'' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
@item
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
@end enumerate
@iftex
@heading END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
@end iftex
@ifinfo
@center END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
@end ifinfo
@page
@unnumberedsec How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
the ``copyright'' line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
@smallexample
@var{one line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does.}
Copyright (C) 19@var{yy} @var{name of author}
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.
@end smallexample
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
when it starts in an interactive mode:
@smallexample
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19@var{yy} @var{name of author}
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome
to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'
for details.
@end smallexample
The hypothetical commands @samp{show w} and @samp{show c} should show
the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the
commands you use may be called something other than @samp{show w} and
@samp{show c}; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items---whatever
suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
school, if any, to sign a ``copyright disclaimer'' for the program, if
necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
@smallexample
@group
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
interest in the program `Gnomovision'
(which makes passes at compilers) written
by James Hacker.
@var{signature of Ty Coon}, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
@end group
@end smallexample
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
Public License instead of this License.
libextractor-1.9/doc/mdate-sh 0000755 0001750 0001750 00000013726 13321734764 013226 0000000 0000000 #!/bin/sh
# Get modification time of a file or directory and pretty-print it.
scriptversion=2015-04-09.19; # UTC
# Copyright (C) 1995-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
# written by Ulrich Drepper , June 1995
#
# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
# any later version.
#
# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
# GNU General Public License for more details.
#
# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
# along with this program. If not, see .
# As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you
# distribute this file as part of a program that contains a
# configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under
# the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program.
# This file is maintained in Automake, please report
# bugs to or send patches to
# .
if test -n "${ZSH_VERSION+set}" && (emulate sh) >/dev/null 2>&1; then
emulate sh
NULLCMD=:
# Pre-4.2 versions of Zsh do word splitting on ${1+"$@"}, which
# is contrary to our usage. Disable this feature.
alias -g '${1+"$@"}'='"$@"'
setopt NO_GLOB_SUBST
fi
case $1 in
'')
echo "$0: No file. Try '$0 --help' for more information." 1>&2
exit 1;
;;
-h | --h*)
cat <<\EOF
Usage: mdate-sh [--help] [--version] FILE
Pretty-print the modification day of FILE, in the format:
1 January 1970
Report bugs to .
EOF
exit $?
;;
-v | --v*)
echo "mdate-sh $scriptversion"
exit $?
;;
esac
error ()
{
echo "$0: $1" >&2
exit 1
}
# Prevent date giving response in another language.
LANG=C
export LANG
LC_ALL=C
export LC_ALL
LC_TIME=C
export LC_TIME
# Use UTC to get reproducible result
TZ=UTC
export TZ
# GNU ls changes its time format in response to the TIME_STYLE
# variable. Since we cannot assume 'unset' works, revert this
# variable to its documented default.
if test "${TIME_STYLE+set}" = set; then
TIME_STYLE=posix-long-iso
export TIME_STYLE
fi
save_arg1=$1
# Find out how to get the extended ls output of a file or directory.
if ls -L /dev/null 1>/dev/null 2>&1; then
ls_command='ls -L -l -d'
else
ls_command='ls -l -d'
fi
# Avoid user/group names that might have spaces, when possible.
if ls -n /dev/null 1>/dev/null 2>&1; then
ls_command="$ls_command -n"
fi
# A 'ls -l' line looks as follows on OS/2.
# drwxrwx--- 0 Aug 11 2001 foo
# This differs from Unix, which adds ownership information.
# drwxrwx--- 2 root root 4096 Aug 11 2001 foo
#
# To find the date, we split the line on spaces and iterate on words
# until we find a month. This cannot work with files whose owner is a
# user named "Jan", or "Feb", etc. However, it's unlikely that '/'
# will be owned by a user whose name is a month. So we first look at
# the extended ls output of the root directory to decide how many
# words should be skipped to get the date.
# On HPUX /bin/sh, "set" interprets "-rw-r--r--" as options, so the "x" below.
set x`$ls_command /`
# Find which argument is the month.
month=
command=
until test $month
do
test $# -gt 0 || error "failed parsing '$ls_command /' output"
shift
# Add another shift to the command.
command="$command shift;"
case $1 in
Jan) month=January; nummonth=1;;
Feb) month=February; nummonth=2;;
Mar) month=March; nummonth=3;;
Apr) month=April; nummonth=4;;
May) month=May; nummonth=5;;
Jun) month=June; nummonth=6;;
Jul) month=July; nummonth=7;;
Aug) month=August; nummonth=8;;
Sep) month=September; nummonth=9;;
Oct) month=October; nummonth=10;;
Nov) month=November; nummonth=11;;
Dec) month=December; nummonth=12;;
esac
done
test -n "$month" || error "failed parsing '$ls_command /' output"
# Get the extended ls output of the file or directory.
set dummy x`eval "$ls_command \"\\\$save_arg1\""`
# Remove all preceding arguments
eval $command
# Because of the dummy argument above, month is in $2.
#
# On a POSIX system, we should have
#
# $# = 5
# $1 = file size
# $2 = month
# $3 = day
# $4 = year or time
# $5 = filename
#
# On Darwin 7.7.0 and 7.6.0, we have
#
# $# = 4
# $1 = day
# $2 = month
# $3 = year or time
# $4 = filename
# Get the month.
case $2 in
Jan) month=January; nummonth=1;;
Feb) month=February; nummonth=2;;
Mar) month=March; nummonth=3;;
Apr) month=April; nummonth=4;;
May) month=May; nummonth=5;;
Jun) month=June; nummonth=6;;
Jul) month=July; nummonth=7;;
Aug) month=August; nummonth=8;;
Sep) month=September; nummonth=9;;
Oct) month=October; nummonth=10;;
Nov) month=November; nummonth=11;;
Dec) month=December; nummonth=12;;
esac
case $3 in
???*) day=$1;;
*) day=$3; shift;;
esac
# Here we have to deal with the problem that the ls output gives either
# the time of day or the year.
case $3 in
*:*) set `date`; eval year=\$$#
case $2 in
Jan) nummonthtod=1;;
Feb) nummonthtod=2;;
Mar) nummonthtod=3;;
Apr) nummonthtod=4;;
May) nummonthtod=5;;
Jun) nummonthtod=6;;
Jul) nummonthtod=7;;
Aug) nummonthtod=8;;
Sep) nummonthtod=9;;
Oct) nummonthtod=10;;
Nov) nummonthtod=11;;
Dec) nummonthtod=12;;
esac
# For the first six month of the year the time notation can also
# be used for files modified in the last year.
if (expr $nummonth \> $nummonthtod) > /dev/null;
then
year=`expr $year - 1`
fi;;
*) year=$3;;
esac
# The result.
echo $day $month $year
# Local Variables:
# mode: shell-script
# sh-indentation: 2
# eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
# time-stamp-start: "scriptversion="
# time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
# time-stamp-time-zone: "UTC"
# time-stamp-end: "; # UTC"
# End:
libextractor-1.9/doc/libextractor.texi 0000644 0001750 0001750 00000106410 13312531357 015155 0000000 0000000 \input texinfo @c -*- Texinfo -*-
@c % The structure of this document is based on the
@c % Texinfo manual from libgcrypt by Werner Koch and
@c % and Moritz Schulte.
@c %**start of header
@setfilename libextractor.info
@include version.texi
@settitle The GNU libextractor Reference Manual
@c Unify all the indices into concept index.
@syncodeindex fn cp
@syncodeindex vr cp
@syncodeindex ky cp
@syncodeindex pg cp
@syncodeindex tp cp
@c %**end of header
@copying
This manual is for GNU libextractor
(version @value{VERSION}, @value{UPDATED}), a library for metadata
extraction.
Copyright @copyright{} 2007, 2010, 2012 Christian Grothoff
@quotation
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover
Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
Free Documentation License''.
@end quotation
@end copying
@dircategory Software libraries
@direntry
* Libextractor: (libextractor). Metadata extraction library.
@end direntry
@c
@c Titlepage
@c
@titlepage
@title The GNU libextractor Reference Manual
@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
@subtitle @value{UPDATED}
@author Christian Grothoff (@email{christian@@grothoff.org})
@page
@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
@insertcopying
@end titlepage
@summarycontents
@contents
@ifnottex
@node Top
@top The GNU libextractor Reference Manual
@insertcopying
@end ifnottex
@menu
* Introduction:: What is GNU libextractor.
* Preparation:: What you should do before using the library.
* Generalities:: General library functions and data types.
* Extracting meta data:: How to use GNU libextractor to obtain meta data.
* Language bindings:: How to use GNU libextractor from languages other than C.
* Utility functions:: Utility functions of GNU libextractor.
* Existing Plugins:: What plugins are available.
* Writing new Plugins:: How to write new plugins for GNU libextractor.
* Internal utility functions:: Utility functions of GNU libextractor for writing plugins.
* Reporting bugs:: How to report bugs or request new features.
Appendices
* GNU Free Documentation License:: Copying this manual.
Indices
* Index:: Index
@c * Function and Data Index:: Index of functions, variables and data types.
@c * Type Index:: Index of data types.
@end menu
@c **********************************************************
@c ******************* Introduction ***********************
@c **********************************************************
@node Introduction
@chapter Introduction
@cindex error handling
GNU libextractor is GNU's library for extracting meta data from
files. Meta data includes format information (such as mime type,
image dimensions, color depth, recording frequency), content
descriptions (such as document title or document description) and
copyright information (such as license, author and contributors).
Meta data extraction is an inherently uncertain business --- a parse
error can be a corrupt file, an incompatibility in the file format
version, an entirely different file format or a bug in the parser. As
a result of this uncertainty, GNU libextractor deliberately
avoids to ever report any errors. Unexpected file contents simply
result in less or possibly no meta data being extracted.
@cindex plugin
GNU libextractor uses plugins to handle various file formats.
Technically a plugin can support multiple file formats; however, most
plugins only support one particular format. By default,
GNU libextractor will use all plugins that are available and found
in the plugin installation directory. Applications can
request the use of only specific plugins or the exclusion of
certain plugins.
GNU libextractor is distributed with the @command{extract}
command@footnote{Some distributions ship @command{extract} in a
seperate package.} which is a command-line tool for extracting
meta data. @command{extract} is given a list of filenames and
prints the resulting meta data to the console. The @command{extract}
source code also serves as an advanced example for how to use
GNU libextractor.
This manual focuses on providing documentation for writing software
with GNU libextractor. The only relevant parts for end-users
are the chapter on compiling and installing GNU libextractor
(@xref{Preparation}.). Also, the chapter on existing plugins maybe of
interest (@xref{Existing Plugins}.). Additional documentation for
end-users can be find in the man page on @command{extract} (using
@verb{|man extract|}).
@cindex license
GNU libextractor is licensed under the GNU General Public License,
specifically, since version 0.7, GNU libextractor is licensed under GPLv3
@emph{or any later version}.
@node Preparation
@chapter Preparation
This chapter first describes the general build instructions that
should apply to all systems. Specific instructions for known problems
for particular platforms are then described in individual sections
afterwards.
Compiling GNU libextractor follows the standard GNU autotools build process
using @command{configure} and @command{make}. For details on the GNU
autotools build process, read the @file{INSTALL} file and query
@verb{|./configure --help|} for additional options.
GNU libextractor has various dependencies, most of which are optional.
Instead of specifying the names of the software packages, we
will give the list in terms of the names of the respective
Debian (wheezy) packages that should be installed.
You absolutely need:
@itemize @bullet
@item
libtool
@item
gcc
@item
make
@item
g++
@item
libltdl7-dev
@end itemize
Recommended dependencies are:
@itemize @bullet
@item
zlib1g-dev
@item
libbz2-dev
@item
libgif-dev
@item
libvorbis-dev
@item
libflac-dev
@item
libmpeg2-4-dev
@item
librpm-dev
@item
libgtk2.0-dev or libgtk3.0-dev
@item
libgsf-1-dev
@item
libqt4-dev
@item
libpoppler-dev
@item
libexiv2-dev
@item
libavformat-dev
@item
libswscale-dev
@item
libgstreamer1.0-dev
@end itemize
For Subversion access and compilation one also needs:
@itemize @bullet
@item
subversion
@item
autoconf
@item
automake
@end itemize
Please notify us if we missed some dependencies (note that the list is
supposed to only list direct dependencies, not transitive
dependencies).
Once you have compiled and installed GNU libextractor, you should have a file
@file{extractor.h} installed in your @file{include/} directory. This
file should be the starting point for your C and C++ development with
GNU libextractor. The build process also installs the @file{extract} binary and
man pages for @file{extract} and GNU libextractor. The @file{extract} man page
documents the @file{extract} tool. The GNU libextractor man page gives a brief
summary of the C API for GNU libextractor.
@cindex packageing
@cindex directory structure
@cindex plugin
@cindex environment variables
@vindex LIBEXTRACTOR_PREFIX
When you install GNU libextractor, various plugins will be
installed in the @file{lib/libextractor/} directory. The main library
will be installed as @file{lib/libextractor.so}. Note that
GNU libextractor will attempt to find the plugins relative to the
path of the main library. Consequently, a package manager can move
the library and its plugins to a different location later --- as long
as the relative path between the main library and the plugins is
preserved. As a method of last resort, the user can specify an
environment variable @verb{|LIBEXTRACTOR_PREFIX|}. If
GNU libextractor cannot locate a plugin, it will look in
@verb{|LIBEXTRACTOR_PREFIX/lib/libextractor/|}.
@section Installation on GNU/Linux
Should work using the standard instructions without problems.
@section Installation on FreeBSD
Should work using the standard instructions without problems.
@section Installation on OpenBSD
OpenBSD 3.8 also doesn't have CODESET in @file{langinfo.h}. CODESET
is used in GNU libextractor in about three places. This causes problems
during compilation.
@section Installation on NetBSD
No reports so far.
@section Installation using MinGW
Linking -lstdc++ with the provided libtool fails on Cygwin, this
is a problem with libtool, there is unfortunately no flag to tell
libtool how to do its job on Cygwin and it seems that it cannot be the
default to set the library check to 'pass_all'. Patching libtool may
help.
Note: this is a rather dated report and may no longer apply.
@section Installation on OS X
libextractor has two installation methods on Mac OS X: it can be
installed as a Mac OS X framework or with the standard
@command{./configure; make; make install} shell commands. The
framework package is self-contained, but currently omits some of the
extractor plugins that can be compiled in if libextractor is installed
with @command{./configure; make; make install} (provided that the
required dependencies exist.)
@subsection Installing and uninstalling the framework
The binary framework is distributed as a disk image (@file{Extractor-x.x.xx.dmg}).
Installation is done by opening the disk image and clicking @file{Extractor.pkg}
inside it. The Mac OS X installer application will then run. The framework
is installed to the root volume's @file{/Library/Frameworks} folder and installing
will require admin privileges.
The framework can be uninstalled by dragging @*
@file{/Library/Frameworks/Extractor.framework} to the @file{Trash}.
@subsection Using the framework
In the framework, the @command{extract} command line tool can be found at @*
@file{/Library/Frameworks/Extractor.framework/Versions/Current/bin/extract}
The framework can be used in software projects as a framework or as a dynamic
library.
When using the framework as a dynamic library in projects using autotools,
one would most likely want to add @*
"-I/Library/Frameworks/Extractor.framework/Versions/Current/include"
to CPPFLAGS and @*
"-L/Library/Frameworks/Extractor.framework/Versions/Current/lib"
to LDFLAGS.
@subsection Example for using the framework
@example
@verbatim
// hello.c
#include
int
main (int argc, char **argv)
{
struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *el;
el = EXTRACTOR_plugin_load_defaults (EXTRACTOR_OPTION_DEFAULT_POLICY);
// ...
EXTRACTOR_plugin_remove_all (el);
return 0;
}
@end verbatim
@end example
You can then compile the example using
@verbatim
$ gcc -o hello hello.c -framework Extractor
@end verbatim
@subsection Example for using the dynamic library
@example
@verbatim
// hello.c
#include
int main()
{
struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *el;
el = EXTRACTOR_plugin_load_defaults (EXTRACTOR_OPTION_DEFAULT_POLICY);
// ...
EXTRACTOR_plugin_remove_all (el);
return 0;
}
@end verbatim
@end example
You can then compile the example using
@verbatim
$ gcc -I/Library/Frameworks/Extractor.framework/Versions/Current/include \
-o hello hello.c \
-L/Library/Frameworks/Extractor.framework/Versions/Current/lib \
-lextractor
@end verbatim
Notice the difference in the @code{#include} line.
@section Note to package maintainers
The suggested way to package GNU libextractor is to split it into
roughly the following binary packages:
@itemize @bullet
@item
libextractor (main library only, only hard dependency for other packages depending on GNU libextractor)
@item
extract (command-line tool and man page extract.1)
@item
libextractor-dev (extractor.h header and man page libextractor.3)
@item
libextractor-doc (this manual)
@item
libextractor-plugins (plugins without external dependencies; recommended but not required by extract and libextractor package)
@item
libextractor-plugin-XXX (plugin with dependency on libXXX, for example for XXX=mpeg this would be @file{libextractor_mpeg.so})
@item
libextractor-plugins-all (meta package that requires all plugins except experimental plugins)
@end itemize
This would enable minimal installations (i.e. for embedded systems) to
not include any plugins, as well as moderate-size installations (that
do not trigger GTK and X11) for systems that have limited resources.
Right now, the MP4 plugin is experimental and does nothing and should
thus never be included at all. The gstreamer plugin is experimental
but largely works with the correct version of gstreamer and can thus
be packaged (especially if the dependency is available on the target
system) but should probably not be part of libextractor-plugins-all.
@node Generalities
@chapter Generalities
@section Introduction to the ``extract'' command
The @command{extract} command takes a list of file names as arguments,
extracts meta data from each of those files and prints the result to
the console. By default, @command{extract} will use all available
plugins and print all (non-binary) meta data that is found.
The set of plugins used by @command{extract} can be controlled using
the ``-l'' and ``-n'' options. Use ``-n'' to not load all of the
default plugins. Use ``-l NAME'' to specifically load a certain
plugin. For example, specify ``-n -l mime'' to only use the MIME
plugin.
Using the ``-p'' option the output of @command{extract} can be limited
to only certain keyword types. Similarly, using the ``-x'' option,
certain keyword types can be excluded. A list of all known keyword
types can be obtained using the ``-L'' option.
The output format of @command{extract} can be influenced with the
``-V'' (more verbose, lists filenames), ``-g'' (grep-friendly, all
meta data on a single line per file) and ``-b'' (bibTeX style)
options.
@section Common usage examples for ``extract''
@example
$ extract test/test.jpg
comment - (C) 2001 by Christian Grothoff, using gimp 1.2 1
mimetype - image/jpeg
$ extract -V -x comment test/test.jpg
Keywords for file test/test.jpg:
mimetype - image/jpeg
$ extract -p comment test/test.jpg
comment - (C) 2001 by Christian Grothoff, using gimp 1.2 1
$ extract -nV -l png.so -p comment test/test.jpg test/test.png
Keywords for file test/test.jpg:
Keywords for file test/test.png:
comment - Testing keyword extraction
@end example
@section Introduction to the libextractor library
Each public symbol exported by GNU libextractor has the prefix
@verb{|EXTRACTOR_|}. All-caps names are used for constants. For the
impatient, the minimal C code for using GNU libextractor (on the
executing binary itself) looks like this:
@verbatim
#include
int
main (int argc, char ** argv)
{
struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *plugins
= EXTRACTOR_plugin_add_defaults (EXTRACTOR_OPTION_DEFAULT_POLICY);
EXTRACTOR_extract (plugins, argv[1],
NULL, 0,
&EXTRACTOR_meta_data_print, stdout);
EXTRACTOR_plugin_remove_all (plugins);
return 0;
}
@end verbatim
The minimal API illustrated by this example is actually sufficient for
many applications. The full external C API of GNU libextractor is described
in chapter @xref{Extracting meta data}. Bindings for other languages
are described in chapter @xref{Language bindings}. The API for
writing new plugins is described in chapter @xref{Writing new Plugins}.
Note that it is possible for GNU libextractor to encounter a @code{SIGPIPE}
during its execution. GNU libextractor --- as it is a library and as such
should not interfere with your main application --- does NOT install a
signal handler for @code{SIGPIPE}. You thus need to install a signal
handler (or at least tell your system to ignore @code{SIGPIPE}) if you
want to avoid unexpected problems during calls to GNU libextractor.
@cindex SIGPIPE
@node Extracting meta data
@chapter Extracting meta data
In order to extract meta data with GNU libextractor you first need to
load the respective plugins and then call the extraction API
with the plugins and the data to process. This section
documents how to load and unload plugins, the various types
and formats in which meta data is returned to the application
and finally the extraction API itself.
@menu
* Plugin management:: How to load and unload plugins
* Meta types:: About meta types
* Meta formats:: About meta formats
* Extracting:: How to use the extraction API
@end menu
@node Plugin management
@section Plugin management
@cindex reentrant
@cindex concurrency
@cindex threads
@cindex thread-safety
@tindex enum EXTRACTOR_Options
Using GNU libextractor from a multi-threaded parent process requires some
care. The problem is that on most platforms GNU libextractor starts
sub-processes for the actual extraction work. This is useful to
isolate the parent process from potential bugs; however, it can cause
problems if the parent process is multi-threaded. The issue is that
at the time of the fork, another thread of the application may hold a
lock (i.e. in gettext or libc). That lock would then never be
released in the child process (as the other thread is not present in
the child process). As a result, the child process would then
deadlock on trying to acquire the lock and never terminate. This has
actually been observed with a lock in GNU gettext that is triggered by
the plugin startup code when it interacts with libltdl.
The problem can be solved by loading the plugins using the
@code{EXTRACTOR_OPTION_IN_PROCESS} option, which will run GNU libextractor
in-process and thus avoid the locking issue. In this case, all of the
functions for loading and unloading plugins, including
@verb{|EXTRACTOR_plugin_add_defaults|} and
@verb{|EXTRACTOR_plugin_remove_all|}, are thread-safe and reentrant.
However, using the same plugin list from multiple threads at the same
time is not safe.
All plugin code is expected required to be reentrant and state-less,
but due to the extensive use of 3rd party libraries this cannot
be guaranteed.
@deftp {C Struct} EXTRACTOR_PluginList
@tindex struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList
A plugin list represents a set of GNU libextractor plugins. Most of
the GNU libextractor API is concerned with either constructing a
plugin list or using it to extract meta data. The internal representation
of the plugin list is of no concern to users or plugin developers.
@end deftp
@deftypefun void EXTRACTOR_plugin_remove_all (struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *plugins)
@findex EXTRACTOR_plugin_remove_all
Unload all of the plugins in the given list.
@end deftypefun
@deftypefun {struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *} EXTRACTOR_plugin_remove (struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *plugins, const char*name)
@findex EXTRACTOR_plugin_remove
Unloads a particular plugin. The given name should be the short name of the plugin, for example ``mime'' for the mime-type extractor or ``mpeg'' for the MPEG extractor.
@end deftypefun
@deftypefun {struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *} EXTRACTOR_plugin_add (struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *plugins, const char* name,const char* options, enum EXTRACTOR_Options flags)
@findex EXTRACTOR_plugin_add
Loads a particular plugin. The plugin is added to the existing list, which can be @code{NULL}. The second argument specifies the name of the plugin (i.e. ``ogg''). The third argument can be @code{NULL} and specifies plugin-specific options. Finally, the last argument specifies if the plugin should be executed out-of-process (@code{EXTRACTOR_OPTION_DEFAULT_POLICY}) or not.
@end deftypefun
@deftypefun {struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *} EXTRACTOR_plugin_add_config (struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *plugins, const char* config, enum EXTRACTOR_Options flags)
@findex EXTRACTOR_plugin_add_config
Loads and unloads plugins based on a configuration string, modifying the existing list, which can be @code{NULL}. The string has the format ``[-]NAME(OPTIONS)@{:[-]NAME(OPTIONS)@}*''. Prefixing the plugin name with a ``-'' means that the plugin should be unloaded.
@end deftypefun
@deftypefun {struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *} EXTRACTOR_plugin_add_defaults (enum EXTRACTOR_Options flags)
@findex EXTRACTOR_plugin_add_defaults
Loads all of the plugins in the plugin directory. This function is what most GNU libextractor applications should use to setup the plugins.
@end deftypefun
@node Meta types
@section Meta types
@tindex enum EXTRACTOR_MetaType
@findex EXTRACTOR_metatype_get_max
@verb{|enum EXTRACTOR_MetaType|} is a C enum which defines a list of over 100 different types of meta data. The total number can differ between different GNU libextractor releases; the maximum value for the current release can be obtained using the @verb{|EXTRACTOR_metatype_get_max|} function. All values in this enumeration are of the form @verb{|EXTRACTOR_METATYPE_XXX|}.
@deftypefun {const char *} EXTRACTOR_metatype_to_string (enum EXTRACTOR_MetaType type)
@findex EXTRACTOR_metatype_to_string
@cindex gettext
@cindex internationalization
The function @verb{|EXTRACTOR_metatype_to_string|} can be used to obtain a short English string @samp{s} describing the meta data type. The string can be translated into other languages using GNU gettext with the domain set to GNU libextractor (@verb{|dgettext("libextractor", s)|}).
@end deftypefun
@deftypefun {const char *} EXTRACTOR_metatype_to_description (enum EXTRACTOR_MetaType type)
@findex EXTRACTOR_metatype_to_description
@cindex gettext
@cindex internationalization
The function @verb{|EXTRACTOR_metatype_to_description|} can be used to obtain a longer English string @samp{s} describing the meta data type. The description may be empty if the short description returned by @code{EXTRACTOR_metatype_to_string} is already comprehensive. The string can be translated into other languages using GNU gettext with the domain set to GNU libextractor (@verb{|dgettext("libextractor", s)|}).
@end deftypefun
@node Meta formats
@section Meta formats
@tindex enum EXTRACTOR_MetaFormat
@verb{|enum EXTRACTOR_MetaFormat|} is a C enum which defines on a high level how the extracted meta data is represented. Currently, the library uses three formats: UTF-8 strings, C strings and binary data. A fourth value, @code{EXTRACTOR_METAFORMAT_UNKNOWN} is defined but not used. UTF-8 strings are 0-terminated strings that have been converted to UTF-8. The format code is @code{EXTRACTOR_METAFORMAT_UTF8}. Ideally, most text meta data will be of this format. Some file formats fail to specify the encoding used for the text. In this case, the text cannot be converted to UTF-8. However, the meta data is still known to be 0-terminated and presumably human-readable. In this case, the format code used is @code{EXTRACTOR_METAFORMAT_C_STRING}; however, this should not be understood to mean that the encoding is the same as that used by the C compiler. Finally, for binary data (mostly images), the format @code{EXTRACTOR_METAFORMAT_BINARY} is used.
Naturally this is not a precise description of the meta format. Plugins can provide a more precise description (if known) by providing the respective mime type of the meta data. For example, binary image meta data could be also tagged as ``image/png'' and normal text would typically be tagged as ``text/plain''.
@node Extracting
@section Extracting
@deftypefn {Function Pointer} int (*EXTRACTOR_MetaDataProcessor)(void *cls, const char *plugin_name, enum EXTRACTOR_MetaType type, enum EXTRACTOR_MetaFormat format, const char *data_mime_type, const char *data, size_t data_len)
@tindex EXTRACTOR_MetaDataProcessor
Type of a function that libextractor calls for each meta data item found.
@table @var
@item cls
closure (user-defined)
@item plugin_name
name of the plugin that produced this value; special values can be used (i.e. '' for zlib being used in the main libextractor library and yielding meta data);
@item type
libextractor-type describing the meta data;
@item format basic
format information about data
@item data_mime_type
mime-type of data (not of the original file); can be @code{NULL} (if mime-type is not known);
@item data
actual meta-data found
@item data_len
number of bytes in data
@end table
Return 0 to continue extracting, 1 to abort.
@end deftypefn
@deftypefun void EXTRACTOR_extract (struct EXTRACTOR_PluginList *plugins, const char *filename, const void *data, size_t size, EXTRACTOR_MetaDataProcessor proc, void *proc_cls)
@findex EXTRACTOR_extract
@cindex reentrant
@cindex concurrency
@cindex threads
@cindex thread-safety
This is the main function for extracting keywords with GNU libextractor. The first argument is a plugin list which specifies the set of plugins that should be used for extracting meta data. The @samp{filename} argument is optional and can be used to specify the name of a file to process. If @samp{filename} is @code{NULL}, then the @samp{data} argument must point to the in-memory data to extract meta data from. If @samp{filename} is non-@code{NULL}, @samp{data} can be @code{NULL}. If @samp{data} is non-null, then @samp{size} is the size of @samp{data} in bytes. Otherwise @samp{size} should be zero. For each meta data item found, GNU libextractor will call the @samp{proc} function, passing @samp{proc_cls} as the first argument to @samp{proc}. The other arguments to @samp{proc} depend on the specific meta data found.
@cindex SIGBUS
@cindex bus error
Meta data extraction should never really fail --- at worst, GNU libextractor should not call @samp{proc} with any meta data. By design, GNU libextractor should never crash or leak memory, even given corrupt files as input. Note however, that running GNU libextractor on a corrupt file system (or incorrectly @verb{|mmap|}ed files) can result in the operating system sending a SIGBUS (bus error) to the process. As GNU libextractor typically runs plugins out-of-process, it first maps the file into memory and then attempts to decompress it. During decompression it is possible to encounter a SIGBUS. GNU libextractor will @emph{not} attempt to catch this signal and your application is likely to crash. Note again that this should only happen if the file @emph{system} is corrupt (not if individual files are corrupt). If this is not acceptable, you might want to consider running GNU libextractor itself also out-of-process (as done, for example, by @url{http://grothoff.org/christian/doodle/,doodle}).
@end deftypefun
@node Language bindings
@chapter Language bindings
@cindex Java
@cindex Mono
@cindex Perl
@cindex Python
@cindex PHP
@cindex Ruby
GNU libextractor works immediately with C and C++ code. Bindings for Java, Mono, Ruby, Perl, PHP and Python are available for download from the main GNU libextractor website. Documentation for these bindings (if available) is part of the downloads for the respective binding. In all cases, a full installation of the C library is required before the binding can be installed.
@section Java
Compiling the GNU libextractor Java binding follows the usual process of
running @command{configure} and @command{make}. The result will be a
shared C library @file{libextractor_java.so} with the native code and
a JAR file (installed to @file{$PREFIX/share/java/libextractor.java}).
A minimal example for using GNU libextractor's Java binding would look
like this:
@verbatim
import org.gnu.libextractor.*;
import java.util.ArrayList;
public static void main(String[] args) {
Extractor ex = Extractor.getDefault();
for (int i=0;iread (ec->cls, &data, 4)))
return; /* read error */
if (data_size < 4)
return; /* file too small */
if (0 != memcmp (data, "\177ELF", 4))
return; /* not ELF */
if (0 != ec->proc (ec->cls,
"mymime",
EXTRACTOR_METATYPE_MIMETYPE,
EXTRACTOR_METAFORMAT_UTF8,
"text/plain",
"application/x-executable",
1 + strlen("application/x-executable")))
return;
/* more calls to 'proc' here as needed */
}
@end verbatim
@end example
@node Internal utility functions
@chapter Internal utility functions
Some plugins link against the @code{libextractor_common} library which
provides common abstractions needed by many plugins. This section
documents this internal API for plugin developers. Note that the headers
for this library are (intentionally) not installed: we do not consider
this API stable and it should hence only be used by plugins that are
build and shipped with GNU libextractor. Third-party plugins should
not use it.
@file{convert_numeric.h} defines various conversion functions for
numbers (in particular, byte-order conversion for floating point
numbers).
@file{unzip.h} defines an API for accessing compressed files.
@file{pack.h} provides an interpreter for unpacking structs of integer
numbers from streams and converting from big or little endian to host
byte order at the same time.
@file{convert.h} provides a function for character set conversion described
below.
@deftypefun {char *} EXTRACTOR_common_convert_to_utf8 (const char *input, size_t len, const char *charset)
@cindex UTF-8
@cindex character set
@findex EXTRACTOR_common_convert_to_utf8
Various GNU libextractor plugins make use of the internal
@file{convert.h} header which defines a function
@verb{|EXTRACTOR_common_convert_to_utf8|} which can be used to easily convert text from
any character set to UTF-8. This conversion is important since the
linked list of keywords that is returned by GNU libextractor is
expected to contain only UTF-8 strings. Naturally, proper conversion
may not always be possible since some file formats fail to specify the
character set. In that case, it is often better to not convert at
all.
The arguments to @verb{|EXTRACTOR_common_convert_to_utf8|} are the input string (which
does @emph{not} have to be zero-terminated), the length of the input
string, and the character set (which @emph{must} be zero-terminated).
Which character sets are supported depends on the platform, a list can
generally be obtained using the @command{iconv -l} command. The
return value from @verb{|EXTRACTOR_common_convert_to_utf8|} is a zero-terminated string
in UTF-8 format. The responsibility to free the string is with the
caller, so storing the string in the keyword list is acceptable.
@end deftypefun
@node Reporting bugs
@chapter Reporting bugs
@cindex bug
GNU libextractor uses the @url{https://gnunet.org/bugs/,Mantis bugtracking
system}. If possible, please report bugs there. You can also e-mail
the GNU libextractor mailinglist at @url{libextractor@@gnu.org}.
@c **********************************************************
@c ******************* Appendices *************************
@c **********************************************************
@node GNU Free Documentation License
@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
@include fdl-1.3.texi
@node Index
@unnumbered Index
@printindex cp
@c @node Function and Data Index
@c @unnumbered Function and Data Index
@c @printindex fn
@c @node Type Index
@c @unnumbered Type Index
@c @printindex tp
@bye
libextractor-1.9/doc/Makefile.am 0000644 0001750 0001750 00000000337 13312531357 013615 0000000 0000000 # This Makefile.am is in the public domain
man_MANS = extract.1 libextractor.3
EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)
DISTCLEANFILES = libextractor.cps
info_TEXINFOS = libextractor.texi
libextractor_TEXINFOS = gpl.texi fdl-1.3.texi
libextractor-1.9/doc/Makefile.in 0000644 0001750 0001750 00000076027 13430046003 013625 0000000 0000000 # Makefile.in generated by automake 1.16.1 from Makefile.am.
# @configure_input@
# Copyright (C) 1994-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
# This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation
# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it,
# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved.
# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without
# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
# PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
@SET_MAKE@
VPATH = @srcdir@
am__is_gnu_make = { \
if test -z '$(MAKELEVEL)'; then \
false; \
elif test -n '$(MAKE_HOST)'; then \
true; \
elif test -n '$(MAKE_VERSION)' && test -n '$(CURDIR)'; then \
true; \
else \
false; \
fi; \
}
am__make_running_with_option = \
case $${target_option-} in \
?) ;; \
*) echo "am__make_running_with_option: internal error: invalid" \
"target option '$${target_option-}' specified" >&2; \
exit 1;; \
esac; \
has_opt=no; \
sane_makeflags=$$MAKEFLAGS; \
if $(am__is_gnu_make); then \
sane_makeflags=$$MFLAGS; \
else \
case $$MAKEFLAGS in \
*\\[\ \ ]*) \
bs=\\; \
sane_makeflags=`printf '%s\n' "$$MAKEFLAGS" \
| sed "s/$$bs$$bs[$$bs $$bs ]*//g"`;; \
esac; \
fi; \
skip_next=no; \
strip_trailopt () \
{ \
flg=`printf '%s\n' "$$flg" | sed "s/$$1.*$$//"`; \
}; \
for flg in $$sane_makeflags; do \
test $$skip_next = yes && { skip_next=no; continue; }; \
case $$flg in \
*=*|--*) continue;; \
-*I) strip_trailopt 'I'; skip_next=yes;; \
-*I?*) strip_trailopt 'I';; \
-*O) strip_trailopt 'O'; skip_next=yes;; \
-*O?*) strip_trailopt 'O';; \
-*l) strip_trailopt 'l'; skip_next=yes;; \
-*l?*) strip_trailopt 'l';; \
-[dEDm]) skip_next=yes;; \
-[JT]) skip_next=yes;; \
esac; \
case $$flg in \
*$$target_option*) has_opt=yes; break;; \
esac; \
done; \
test $$has_opt = yes
am__make_dryrun = (target_option=n; $(am__make_running_with_option))
am__make_keepgoing = (target_option=k; $(am__make_running_with_option))
pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@
pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@
pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@
pkglibexecdir = $(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@
am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd
install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644
install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c
install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c
INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA)
transform = $(program_transform_name)
NORMAL_INSTALL = :
PRE_INSTALL = :
POST_INSTALL = :
NORMAL_UNINSTALL = :
PRE_UNINSTALL = :
POST_UNINSTALL = :
build_triplet = @build@
host_triplet = @host@
target_triplet = @target@
subdir = doc
ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4
am__aclocal_m4_deps = $(top_srcdir)/m4/abi-gsf.m4 \
$(top_srcdir)/m4/ac_define_dir.m4 \
$(top_srcdir)/m4/ax_check_compile_flag.m4 \
$(top_srcdir)/m4/ax_check_link_flag.m4 \
$(top_srcdir)/m4/ax_create_pkgconfig_info.m4 \
$(top_srcdir)/m4/gettext.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/glib-2.0.m4 \
$(top_srcdir)/m4/iconv.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-ld.m4 \
$(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-link.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-prefix.m4 \
$(top_srcdir)/m4/libtool.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltoptions.m4 \
$(top_srcdir)/m4/ltsugar.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltversion.m4 \
$(top_srcdir)/m4/lt~obsolete.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/nls.m4 \
$(top_srcdir)/m4/pkg.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/po.m4 \
$(top_srcdir)/m4/progtest.m4 $(top_srcdir)/acinclude.m4 \
$(top_srcdir)/configure.ac
am__configure_deps = $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) \
$(ACLOCAL_M4)
DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(srcdir)/version.texi \
$(srcdir)/stamp-vti $(am__DIST_COMMON)
mkinstalldirs = $(install_sh) -d
CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/config.h
CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES =
CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES =
AM_V_P = $(am__v_P_@AM_V@)
am__v_P_ = $(am__v_P_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
am__v_P_0 = false
am__v_P_1 = :
AM_V_GEN = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_V@)
am__v_GEN_ = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
am__v_GEN_0 = @echo " GEN " $@;
am__v_GEN_1 =
AM_V_at = $(am__v_at_@AM_V@)
am__v_at_ = $(am__v_at_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
am__v_at_0 = @
am__v_at_1 =
SOURCES =
DIST_SOURCES =
AM_V_DVIPS = $(am__v_DVIPS_@AM_V@)
am__v_DVIPS_ = $(am__v_DVIPS_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
am__v_DVIPS_0 = @echo " DVIPS " $@;
am__v_DVIPS_1 =
AM_V_MAKEINFO = $(am__v_MAKEINFO_@AM_V@)
am__v_MAKEINFO_ = $(am__v_MAKEINFO_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
am__v_MAKEINFO_0 = @echo " MAKEINFO" $@;
am__v_MAKEINFO_1 =
AM_V_INFOHTML = $(am__v_INFOHTML_@AM_V@)
am__v_INFOHTML_ = $(am__v_INFOHTML_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
am__v_INFOHTML_0 = @echo " INFOHTML" $@;
am__v_INFOHTML_1 =
AM_V_TEXI2DVI = $(am__v_TEXI2DVI_@AM_V@)
am__v_TEXI2DVI_ = $(am__v_TEXI2DVI_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
am__v_TEXI2DVI_0 = @echo " TEXI2DVI" $@;
am__v_TEXI2DVI_1 =
AM_V_TEXI2PDF = $(am__v_TEXI2PDF_@AM_V@)
am__v_TEXI2PDF_ = $(am__v_TEXI2PDF_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
am__v_TEXI2PDF_0 = @echo " TEXI2PDF" $@;
am__v_TEXI2PDF_1 =
AM_V_texinfo = $(am__v_texinfo_@AM_V@)
am__v_texinfo_ = $(am__v_texinfo_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
am__v_texinfo_0 = -q
am__v_texinfo_1 =
AM_V_texidevnull = $(am__v_texidevnull_@AM_V@)
am__v_texidevnull_ = $(am__v_texidevnull_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
am__v_texidevnull_0 = > /dev/null
am__v_texidevnull_1 =
INFO_DEPS = $(srcdir)/libextractor.info
TEXINFO_TEX = $(top_srcdir)/build-aux/texinfo.tex
am__TEXINFO_TEX_DIR = $(top_srcdir)/build-aux
DVIS = libextractor.dvi
PDFS = libextractor.pdf
PSS = libextractor.ps
HTMLS = libextractor.html
TEXINFOS = libextractor.texi
TEXI2DVI = texi2dvi
TEXI2PDF = $(TEXI2DVI) --pdf --batch
MAKEINFOHTML = $(MAKEINFO) --html
AM_MAKEINFOHTMLFLAGS = $(AM_MAKEINFOFLAGS)
DVIPS = dvips
am__can_run_installinfo = \
case $$AM_UPDATE_INFO_DIR in \
n|no|NO) false;; \
*) (install-info --version) >/dev/null 2>&1;; \
esac
am__installdirs = "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" \
"$(DESTDIR)$(man3dir)"
am__vpath_adj_setup = srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`;
am__vpath_adj = case $$p in \
$(srcdir)/*) f=`echo "$$p" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \
*) f=$$p;; \
esac;
am__strip_dir = f=`echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`;
am__install_max = 40
am__nobase_strip_setup = \
srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*|]/\\\\&/g'`
am__nobase_strip = \
for p in $$list; do echo "$$p"; done | sed -e "s|$$srcdirstrip/||"
am__nobase_list = $(am__nobase_strip_setup); \
for p in $$list; do echo "$$p $$p"; done | \
sed "s| $$srcdirstrip/| |;"' / .*\//!s/ .*/ ./; s,\( .*\)/[^/]*$$,\1,' | \
$(AWK) 'BEGIN { files["."] = "" } { files[$$2] = files[$$2] " " $$1; \
if (++n[$$2] == $(am__install_max)) \
{ print $$2, files[$$2]; n[$$2] = 0; files[$$2] = "" } } \
END { for (dir in files) print dir, files[dir] }'
am__base_list = \
sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' | \
sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g'
am__uninstall_files_from_dir = { \
test -z "$$files" \
|| { test ! -d "$$dir" && test ! -f "$$dir" && test ! -r "$$dir"; } \
|| { echo " ( cd '$$dir' && rm -f" $$files ")"; \
$(am__cd) "$$dir" && rm -f $$files; }; \
}
man1dir = $(mandir)/man1
man3dir = $(mandir)/man3
NROFF = nroff
MANS = $(man_MANS)
am__tagged_files = $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_FILES) $(LISP)
am__DIST_COMMON = $(libextractor_TEXINFOS) $(srcdir)/Makefile.in \
$(top_srcdir)/build-aux/mdate-sh \
$(top_srcdir)/build-aux/texinfo.tex mdate-sh texinfo.tex
DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST)
ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@
AMTAR = @AMTAR@
AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY = @AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY@
AR = @AR@
AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@
AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@
AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@
AWK = @AWK@
CC = @CC@
CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@
CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@
CPP = @CPP@
CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@
CXX = @CXX@
CXXCPP = @CXXCPP@
CXXDEPMODE = @CXXDEPMODE@
CXXFLAGS = @CXXFLAGS@
CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@
DEFS = @DEFS@
DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@
DLLTOOL = @DLLTOOL@
DSYMUTIL = @DSYMUTIL@
DUMPBIN = @DUMPBIN@
ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@
ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@
ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@
EGREP = @EGREP@
EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@
FGREP = @FGREP@
GDK_PIXBUF_CFLAGS = @GDK_PIXBUF_CFLAGS@
GDK_PIXBUF_LIBS = @GDK_PIXBUF_LIBS@
GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION = @GETTEXT_MACRO_VERSION@
GLIB_CFLAGS = @GLIB_CFLAGS@
GLIB_COMPILE_RESOURCES = @GLIB_COMPILE_RESOURCES@
GLIB_GENMARSHAL = @GLIB_GENMARSHAL@
GLIB_LIBS = @GLIB_LIBS@
GLIB_MKENUMS = @GLIB_MKENUMS@
GMSGFMT = @GMSGFMT@
GMSGFMT_015 = @GMSGFMT_015@
GOBJECT_QUERY = @GOBJECT_QUERY@
GREP = @GREP@
GSF_CFLAGS = @GSF_CFLAGS@
GSF_GNOME_CFLAGS = @GSF_GNOME_CFLAGS@
GSF_GNOME_LIBS = @GSF_GNOME_LIBS@
GSF_LIBS = @GSF_LIBS@
GSTREAMER_APP_CFLAGS = @GSTREAMER_APP_CFLAGS@
GSTREAMER_APP_LIBS = @GSTREAMER_APP_LIBS@
GSTREAMER_CFLAGS = @GSTREAMER_CFLAGS@
GSTREAMER_LIBS = @GSTREAMER_LIBS@
GSTREAMER_PBUTILS_CFLAGS = @GSTREAMER_PBUTILS_CFLAGS@
GSTREAMER_PBUTILS_LIBS = @GSTREAMER_PBUTILS_LIBS@
GSTREAMER_TAG_CFLAGS = @GSTREAMER_TAG_CFLAGS@
GSTREAMER_TAG_LIBS = @GSTREAMER_TAG_LIBS@
HAVE_CXX = @HAVE_CXX@
HAVE_ZZUF = @HAVE_ZZUF@
HIDDEN_VISIBILITY_CFLAGS = @HIDDEN_VISIBILITY_CFLAGS@
INSTALL = @INSTALL@
INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@
INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@
INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@
INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@
INTLLIBS = @INTLLIBS@
INTL_MACOSX_LIBS = @INTL_MACOSX_LIBS@
ISOLOCALEDIR = @ISOLOCALEDIR@
LD = @LD@
LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@
LE_INTLINCL = @LE_INTLINCL@
LE_LIBINTL = @LE_LIBINTL@
LE_LIB_LDFLAGS = @LE_LIB_LDFLAGS@
LE_LIB_LIBS = @LE_LIB_LIBS@
LE_PLUGIN_LDFLAGS = @LE_PLUGIN_LDFLAGS@
LIBEXT = @LIBEXT@
LIBICONV = @LIBICONV@
LIBINTL = @LIBINTL@
LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@
LIBS = @LIBS@
LIBTOOL = @LIBTOOL@
LIB_VERSION_AGE = @LIB_VERSION_AGE@
LIB_VERSION_CURRENT = @LIB_VERSION_CURRENT@
LIB_VERSION_REVISION = @LIB_VERSION_REVISION@
LIPO = @LIPO@
LN_S = @LN_S@
LOCALEDIR = @LOCALEDIR@
LTLIBICONV = @LTLIBICONV@
LTLIBINTL = @LTLIBINTL@
LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@
LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH = @LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH@
MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@
MANIFEST_TOOL = @MANIFEST_TOOL@
MKDIR_P = @MKDIR_P@
MSGFMT = @MSGFMT@
MSGFMT_015 = @MSGFMT_015@
MSGMERGE = @MSGMERGE@
NM = @NM@
NMEDIT = @NMEDIT@
OBJDUMP = @OBJDUMP@
OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@
OTOOL = @OTOOL@
OTOOL64 = @OTOOL64@
PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@
PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@
PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@
PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@
PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@
PACKAGE_URL = @PACKAGE_URL@
PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@
PACKAGE_VERSION_NOALPHA = @PACKAGE_VERSION_NOALPHA@
PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@
PKG_CONFIG = @PKG_CONFIG@
PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR = @PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR@
PKG_CONFIG_PATH = @PKG_CONFIG_PATH@
POSUB = @POSUB@
QT_CPPFLAGS = @QT_CPPFLAGS@
QT_LDFLAGS = @QT_LDFLAGS@
RANLIB = @RANLIB@
RPLUGINDIR = @RPLUGINDIR@
SED = @SED@
SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@
SHELL = @SHELL@
SOCKET_LIBS = @SOCKET_LIBS@
STRIP = @STRIP@
USE_NLS = @USE_NLS@
VERSION = @VERSION@
XGETTEXT = @XGETTEXT@
XGETTEXT_015 = @XGETTEXT_015@
XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS = @XGETTEXT_EXTRA_OPTIONS@
XTRA_CPPLIBS = @XTRA_CPPLIBS@
abs_builddir = @abs_builddir@
abs_srcdir = @abs_srcdir@
abs_top_builddir = @abs_top_builddir@
abs_top_srcdir = @abs_top_srcdir@
ac_ct_AR = @ac_ct_AR@
ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@
ac_ct_CXX = @ac_ct_CXX@
ac_ct_DUMPBIN = @ac_ct_DUMPBIN@
am__include = @am__include@
am__leading_dot = @am__leading_dot@
am__quote = @am__quote@
am__tar = @am__tar@
am__untar = @am__untar@
bindir = @bindir@
build = @build@
build_alias = @build_alias@
build_cpu = @build_cpu@
build_os = @build_os@
build_vendor = @build_vendor@
builddir = @builddir@
datadir = @datadir@
datarootdir = @datarootdir@
docdir = @docdir@
dvidir = @dvidir@
exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@
host = @host@
host_alias = @host_alias@
host_cpu = @host_cpu@
host_os = @host_os@
host_vendor = @host_vendor@
htmldir = @htmldir@
includedir = @includedir@
infodir = @infodir@
install_sh = @install_sh@
libdir = @libdir@
libexecdir = @libexecdir@
localedir = @localedir@
localstatedir = @localstatedir@
mandir = @mandir@
mkdir_p = @mkdir_p@
oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@
pdfdir = @pdfdir@
pkgconfig_libdir = @pkgconfig_libdir@
pkgconfig_libfile = @pkgconfig_libfile@
prefix = @prefix@
program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@
psdir = @psdir@
runstatedir = @runstatedir@
sbindir = @sbindir@
sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@
srcdir = @srcdir@
sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@
target = @target@
target_alias = @target_alias@
target_cpu = @target_cpu@
target_os = @target_os@
target_vendor = @target_vendor@
top_build_prefix = @top_build_prefix@
top_builddir = @top_builddir@
top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@
# This Makefile.am is in the public domain
man_MANS = extract.1 libextractor.3
EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)
DISTCLEANFILES = libextractor.cps
info_TEXINFOS = libextractor.texi
libextractor_TEXINFOS = gpl.texi fdl-1.3.texi
all: all-am
.SUFFIXES:
.SUFFIXES: .dvi .html .info .pdf .ps .texi
$(srcdir)/Makefile.in: $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(am__configure_deps)
@for dep in $?; do \
case '$(am__configure_deps)' in \
*$$dep*) \
( cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh ) \
&& { if test -f $@; then exit 0; else break; fi; }; \
exit 1;; \
esac; \
done; \
echo ' cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/Makefile'; \
$(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) && \
$(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/Makefile
Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status
@case '$?' in \
*config.status*) \
cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh;; \
*) \
echo ' cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles)'; \
cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles);; \
esac;
$(top_builddir)/config.status: $(top_srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES)
cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh
$(top_srcdir)/configure: $(am__configure_deps)
cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh
$(ACLOCAL_M4): $(am__aclocal_m4_deps)
cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh
$(am__aclocal_m4_deps):
mostlyclean-libtool:
-rm -f *.lo
clean-libtool:
-rm -rf .libs _libs
.texi.info:
$(AM_V_MAKEINFO)restore=: && backupdir="$(am__leading_dot)am$$$$" && \
am__cwd=`pwd` && $(am__cd) $(srcdir) && \
rm -rf $$backupdir && mkdir $$backupdir && \
if ($(MAKEINFO) --version) >/dev/null 2>&1; then \
for f in $@ $@-[0-9] $@-[0-9][0-9] $(@:.info=).i[0-9] $(@:.info=).i[0-9][0-9]; do \
if test -f $$f; then mv $$f $$backupdir; restore=mv; else :; fi; \
done; \
else :; fi && \
cd "$$am__cwd"; \
if $(MAKEINFO) $(AM_MAKEINFOFLAGS) $(MAKEINFOFLAGS) -I $(srcdir) \
-o $@ $<; \
then \
rc=0; \
$(am__cd) $(srcdir); \
else \
rc=$$?; \
$(am__cd) $(srcdir) && \
$$restore $$backupdir/* `echo "./$@" | sed 's|[^/]*$$||'`; \
fi; \
rm -rf $$backupdir; exit $$rc
.texi.dvi:
$(AM_V_TEXI2DVI)TEXINPUTS="$(am__TEXINFO_TEX_DIR)$(PATH_SEPARATOR)$$TEXINPUTS" \
MAKEINFO='$(MAKEINFO) $(AM_MAKEINFOFLAGS) $(MAKEINFOFLAGS) -I $(srcdir)' \
$(TEXI2DVI) $(AM_V_texinfo) --build-dir=$(@:.dvi=.t2d) -o $@ $(AM_V_texidevnull) \
$<
.texi.pdf:
$(AM_V_TEXI2PDF)TEXINPUTS="$(am__TEXINFO_TEX_DIR)$(PATH_SEPARATOR)$$TEXINPUTS" \
MAKEINFO='$(MAKEINFO) $(AM_MAKEINFOFLAGS) $(MAKEINFOFLAGS) -I $(srcdir)' \
$(TEXI2PDF) $(AM_V_texinfo) --build-dir=$(@:.pdf=.t2p) -o $@ $(AM_V_texidevnull) \
$<
.texi.html:
$(AM_V_MAKEINFO)rm -rf $(@:.html=.htp)
$(AM_V_at)if $(MAKEINFOHTML) $(AM_MAKEINFOHTMLFLAGS) $(MAKEINFOFLAGS) -I $(srcdir) \
-o $(@:.html=.htp) $<; \
then \
rm -rf $@ && mv $(@:.html=.htp) $@; \
else \
rm -rf $(@:.html=.htp); exit 1; \
fi
$(srcdir)/libextractor.info: libextractor.texi $(srcdir)/version.texi $(libextractor_TEXINFOS)
libextractor.dvi: libextractor.texi $(srcdir)/version.texi $(libextractor_TEXINFOS)
libextractor.pdf: libextractor.texi $(srcdir)/version.texi $(libextractor_TEXINFOS)
libextractor.html: libextractor.texi $(srcdir)/version.texi $(libextractor_TEXINFOS)
$(srcdir)/version.texi: $(srcdir)/stamp-vti
$(srcdir)/stamp-vti: libextractor.texi $(top_srcdir)/configure
@(dir=.; test -f ./libextractor.texi || dir=$(srcdir); \
set `$(SHELL) $(top_srcdir)/build-aux/mdate-sh $$dir/libextractor.texi`; \
echo "@set UPDATED $$1 $$2 $$3"; \
echo "@set UPDATED-MONTH $$2 $$3"; \
echo "@set EDITION $(VERSION)"; \
echo "@set VERSION $(VERSION)") > vti.tmp$$$$ && \
(cmp -s vti.tmp$$$$ $(srcdir)/version.texi \
|| (echo "Updating $(srcdir)/version.texi" && \
cp vti.tmp$$$$ $(srcdir)/version.texi.tmp$$$$ && \
mv $(srcdir)/version.texi.tmp$$$$ $(srcdir)/version.texi)) && \
rm -f vti.tmp$$$$ $(srcdir)/version.texi.$$$$
@cp $(srcdir)/version.texi $@
mostlyclean-vti:
-rm -f vti.tmp* $(srcdir)/version.texi.tmp*
maintainer-clean-vti:
-rm -f $(srcdir)/stamp-vti $(srcdir)/version.texi
.dvi.ps:
$(AM_V_DVIPS)TEXINPUTS="$(am__TEXINFO_TEX_DIR)$(PATH_SEPARATOR)$$TEXINPUTS" \
$(DVIPS) $(AM_V_texinfo) -o $@ $<
uninstall-dvi-am:
@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
@list='$(DVIS)'; test -n "$(dvidir)" || list=; \
for p in $$list; do \
$(am__strip_dir) \
echo " rm -f '$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)/$$f'"; \
rm -f "$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)/$$f"; \
done
uninstall-html-am:
@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
@list='$(HTMLS)'; test -n "$(htmldir)" || list=; \
for p in $$list; do \
$(am__strip_dir) \
echo " rm -rf '$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f'"; \
rm -rf "$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f"; \
done
uninstall-info-am:
@$(PRE_UNINSTALL)
@if test -d '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)' && $(am__can_run_installinfo); then \
list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \
for file in $$list; do \
relfile=`echo "$$file" | sed 's|^.*/||'`; \
echo " install-info --info-dir='$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)' --remove '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile'"; \
if install-info --info-dir="$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" --remove "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile"; \
then :; else test ! -f "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile" || exit 1; fi; \
done; \
else :; fi
@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
@list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \
for file in $$list; do \
relfile=`echo "$$file" | sed 's|^.*/||'`; \
relfile_i=`echo "$$relfile" | sed 's|\.info$$||;s|$$|.i|'`; \
(if test -d "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" && cd "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)"; then \
echo " cd '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)' && rm -f $$relfile $$relfile-[0-9] $$relfile-[0-9][0-9] $$relfile_i[0-9] $$relfile_i[0-9][0-9]"; \
rm -f $$relfile $$relfile-[0-9] $$relfile-[0-9][0-9] $$relfile_i[0-9] $$relfile_i[0-9][0-9]; \
else :; fi); \
done
uninstall-pdf-am:
@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
@list='$(PDFS)'; test -n "$(pdfdir)" || list=; \
for p in $$list; do \
$(am__strip_dir) \
echo " rm -f '$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)/$$f'"; \
rm -f "$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)/$$f"; \
done
uninstall-ps-am:
@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
@list='$(PSS)'; test -n "$(psdir)" || list=; \
for p in $$list; do \
$(am__strip_dir) \
echo " rm -f '$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)/$$f'"; \
rm -f "$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)/$$f"; \
done
dist-info: $(INFO_DEPS)
@srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; \
list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \
for base in $$list; do \
case $$base in \
$(srcdir)/*) base=`echo "$$base" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \
esac; \
if test -f $$base; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \
base_i=`echo "$$base" | sed 's|\.info$$||;s|$$|.i|'`; \
for file in $$d/$$base $$d/$$base-[0-9] $$d/$$base-[0-9][0-9] $$d/$$base_i[0-9] $$d/$$base_i[0-9][0-9]; do \
if test -f $$file; then \
relfile=`expr "$$file" : "$$d/\(.*\)"`; \
test -f "$(distdir)/$$relfile" || \
cp -p $$file "$(distdir)/$$relfile"; \
else :; fi; \
done; \
done
mostlyclean-aminfo:
-rm -rf libextractor.t2d libextractor.t2p
clean-aminfo:
-test -z "libextractor.dvi libextractor.pdf libextractor.ps libextractor.html" \
|| rm -rf libextractor.dvi libextractor.pdf libextractor.ps libextractor.html
maintainer-clean-aminfo:
@list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; for i in $$list; do \
i_i=`echo "$$i" | sed 's|\.info$$||;s|$$|.i|'`; \
echo " rm -f $$i $$i-[0-9] $$i-[0-9][0-9] $$i_i[0-9] $$i_i[0-9][0-9]"; \
rm -f $$i $$i-[0-9] $$i-[0-9][0-9] $$i_i[0-9] $$i_i[0-9][0-9]; \
done
install-man1: $(man_MANS)
@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
@list1=''; \
list2='$(man_MANS)'; \
test -n "$(man1dir)" \
&& test -n "`echo $$list1$$list2`" \
|| exit 0; \
echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'"; \
$(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" || exit 1; \
{ for i in $$list1; do echo "$$i"; done; \
if test -n "$$list2"; then \
for i in $$list2; do echo "$$i"; done \
| sed -n '/\.1[a-z]*$$/p'; \
fi; \
} | while read p; do \
if test -f $$p; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \
echo "$$d$$p"; echo "$$p"; \
done | \
sed -e 'n;s,.*/,,;p;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^1][0-9a-z]*$$,1,;x' \
-e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,' | \
sed 'N;N;s,\n, ,g' | { \
list=; while read file base inst; do \
if test "$$base" = "$$inst"; then list="$$list $$file"; else \
echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$file' '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst'"; \
$(INSTALL_DATA) "$$file" "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst" || exit $$?; \
fi; \
done; \
for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done | $(am__base_list) | \
while read files; do \
test -z "$$files" || { \
echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'"; \
$(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" || exit $$?; }; \
done; }
uninstall-man1:
@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
@list=''; test -n "$(man1dir)" || exit 0; \
files=`{ for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done; \
l2='$(man_MANS)'; for i in $$l2; do echo "$$i"; done | \
sed -n '/\.1[a-z]*$$/p'; \
} | sed -e 's,.*/,,;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^1][0-9a-z]*$$,1,;x' \
-e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,'`; \
dir='$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'; $(am__uninstall_files_from_dir)
install-man3: $(man_MANS)
@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
@list1=''; \
list2='$(man_MANS)'; \
test -n "$(man3dir)" \
&& test -n "`echo $$list1$$list2`" \
|| exit 0; \
echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(man3dir)'"; \
$(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(man3dir)" || exit 1; \
{ for i in $$list1; do echo "$$i"; done; \
if test -n "$$list2"; then \
for i in $$list2; do echo "$$i"; done \
| sed -n '/\.3[a-z]*$$/p'; \
fi; \
} | while read p; do \
if test -f $$p; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \
echo "$$d$$p"; echo "$$p"; \
done | \
sed -e 'n;s,.*/,,;p;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^3][0-9a-z]*$$,3,;x' \
-e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,' | \
sed 'N;N;s,\n, ,g' | { \
list=; while read file base inst; do \
if test "$$base" = "$$inst"; then list="$$list $$file"; else \
echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$file' '$(DESTDIR)$(man3dir)/$$inst'"; \
$(INSTALL_DATA) "$$file" "$(DESTDIR)$(man3dir)/$$inst" || exit $$?; \
fi; \
done; \
for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done | $(am__base_list) | \
while read files; do \
test -z "$$files" || { \
echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(man3dir)'"; \
$(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(man3dir)" || exit $$?; }; \
done; }
uninstall-man3:
@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
@list=''; test -n "$(man3dir)" || exit 0; \
files=`{ for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done; \
l2='$(man_MANS)'; for i in $$l2; do echo "$$i"; done | \
sed -n '/\.3[a-z]*$$/p'; \
} | sed -e 's,.*/,,;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^3][0-9a-z]*$$,3,;x' \
-e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,'`; \
dir='$(DESTDIR)$(man3dir)'; $(am__uninstall_files_from_dir)
tags TAGS:
ctags CTAGS:
cscope cscopelist:
distdir: $(BUILT_SOURCES)
$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) distdir-am
distdir-am: $(DISTFILES)
@srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \
topsrcdirstrip=`echo "$(top_srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \
list='$(DISTFILES)'; \
dist_files=`for file in $$list; do echo $$file; done | \
sed -e "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||;t" \
-e "s|^$$topsrcdirstrip/|$(top_builddir)/|;t"`; \
case $$dist_files in \
*/*) $(MKDIR_P) `echo "$$dist_files" | \
sed '/\//!d;s|^|$(distdir)/|;s,/[^/]*$$,,' | \
sort -u` ;; \
esac; \
for file in $$dist_files; do \
if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \
if test -d $$d/$$file; then \
dir=`echo "/$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \
if test -d "$(distdir)/$$file"; then \
find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \
fi; \
if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \
cp -fpR $(srcdir)/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \
find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \
fi; \
cp -fpR $$d/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \
else \
test -f "$(distdir)/$$file" \
|| cp -p $$d/$$file "$(distdir)/$$file" \
|| exit 1; \
fi; \
done
$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) \
top_distdir="$(top_distdir)" distdir="$(distdir)" \
dist-info
check-am: all-am
check: check-am
all-am: Makefile $(INFO_DEPS) $(MANS)
installdirs:
for dir in "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" "$(DESTDIR)$(man3dir)"; do \
test -z "$$dir" || $(MKDIR_P) "$$dir"; \
done
install: install-am
install-exec: install-exec-am
install-data: install-data-am
uninstall: uninstall-am
install-am: all-am
@$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am
installcheck: installcheck-am
install-strip:
if test -z '$(STRIP)'; then \
$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \
install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \
install; \
else \
$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \
install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \
"INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'" install; \
fi
mostlyclean-generic:
clean-generic:
distclean-generic:
-test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)
-test . = "$(srcdir)" || test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)
-test -z "$(DISTCLEANFILES)" || rm -f $(DISTCLEANFILES)
maintainer-clean-generic:
@echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use"
@echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild."
clean: clean-am
clean-am: clean-aminfo clean-generic clean-libtool mostlyclean-am
distclean: distclean-am
-rm -f Makefile
distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic
dvi: dvi-am
dvi-am: $(DVIS)
html: html-am
html-am: $(HTMLS)
info: info-am
info-am: $(INFO_DEPS)
install-data-am: install-info-am install-man
install-dvi: install-dvi-am
install-dvi-am: $(DVIS)
@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
@list='$(DVIS)'; test -n "$(dvidir)" || list=; \
if test -n "$$list"; then \
echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)'"; \
$(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)" || exit 1; \
fi; \
for p in $$list; do \
if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \
echo "$$d$$p"; \
done | $(am__base_list) | \
while read files; do \
echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)'"; \
$(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)" || exit $$?; \
done
install-exec-am:
install-html: install-html-am
install-html-am: $(HTMLS)
@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
@list='$(HTMLS)'; list2=; test -n "$(htmldir)" || list=; \
if test -n "$$list"; then \
echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)'"; \
$(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)" || exit 1; \
fi; \
for p in $$list; do \
if test -f "$$p" || test -d "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \
$(am__strip_dir) \
d2=$$d$$p; \
if test -d "$$d2"; then \
echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f'"; \
$(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f" || exit 1; \
echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$d2'/* '$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f'"; \
$(INSTALL_DATA) "$$d2"/* "$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f" || exit $$?; \
else \
list2="$$list2 $$d2"; \
fi; \
done; \
test -z "$$list2" || { echo "$$list2" | $(am__base_list) | \
while read files; do \
echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)'"; \
$(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)" || exit $$?; \
done; }
install-info: install-info-am
install-info-am: $(INFO_DEPS)
@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
@srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; \
list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; test -n "$(infodir)" || list=; \
if test -n "$$list"; then \
echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)'"; \
$(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" || exit 1; \
fi; \
for file in $$list; do \
case $$file in \
$(srcdir)/*) file=`echo "$$file" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \
esac; \
if test -f $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \
file_i=`echo "$$file" | sed 's|\.info$$||;s|$$|.i|'`; \
for ifile in $$d/$$file $$d/$$file-[0-9] $$d/$$file-[0-9][0-9] \
$$d/$$file_i[0-9] $$d/$$file_i[0-9][0-9] ; do \
if test -f $$ifile; then \
echo "$$ifile"; \
else : ; fi; \
done; \
done | $(am__base_list) | \
while read files; do \
echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)'"; \
$(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" || exit $$?; done
@$(POST_INSTALL)
@if $(am__can_run_installinfo); then \
list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; test -n "$(infodir)" || list=; \
for file in $$list; do \
relfile=`echo "$$file" | sed 's|^.*/||'`; \
echo " install-info --info-dir='$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)' '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile'";\
install-info --info-dir="$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile" || :;\
done; \
else : ; fi
install-man: install-man1 install-man3
install-pdf: install-pdf-am
install-pdf-am: $(PDFS)
@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
@list='$(PDFS)'; test -n "$(pdfdir)" || list=; \
if test -n "$$list"; then \
echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)'"; \
$(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)" || exit 1; \
fi; \
for p in $$list; do \
if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \
echo "$$d$$p"; \
done | $(am__base_list) | \
while read files; do \
echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)'"; \
$(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)" || exit $$?; done
install-ps: install-ps-am
install-ps-am: $(PSS)
@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
@list='$(PSS)'; test -n "$(psdir)" || list=; \
if test -n "$$list"; then \
echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)'"; \
$(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)" || exit 1; \
fi; \
for p in $$list; do \
if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \
echo "$$d$$p"; \
done | $(am__base_list) | \
while read files; do \
echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)'"; \
$(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)" || exit $$?; done
installcheck-am:
maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am
-rm -f Makefile
maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-aminfo \
maintainer-clean-generic maintainer-clean-vti
mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am
mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-aminfo mostlyclean-generic \
mostlyclean-libtool mostlyclean-vti
pdf: pdf-am
pdf-am: $(PDFS)
ps: ps-am
ps-am: $(PSS)
uninstall-am: uninstall-dvi-am uninstall-html-am uninstall-info-am \
uninstall-man uninstall-pdf-am uninstall-ps-am
uninstall-man: uninstall-man1 uninstall-man3
.MAKE: install-am install-strip
.PHONY: all all-am check check-am clean clean-aminfo clean-generic \
clean-libtool cscopelist-am ctags-am dist-info distclean \
distclean-generic distclean-libtool distdir dvi dvi-am html \
html-am info info-am install install-am install-data \
install-data-am install-dvi install-dvi-am install-exec \
install-exec-am install-html install-html-am install-info \
install-info-am install-man install-man1 install-man3 \
install-pdf install-pdf-am install-ps install-ps-am \
install-strip installcheck installcheck-am installdirs \
maintainer-clean maintainer-clean-aminfo \
maintainer-clean-generic maintainer-clean-vti mostlyclean \
mostlyclean-aminfo mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool \
mostlyclean-vti pdf pdf-am ps ps-am tags-am uninstall \
uninstall-am uninstall-dvi-am uninstall-html-am \
uninstall-info-am uninstall-man uninstall-man1 uninstall-man3 \
uninstall-pdf-am uninstall-ps-am
.PRECIOUS: Makefile
# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables.
# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded.
.NOEXPORT:
libextractor-1.9/doc/extract.1 0000644 0001750 0001750 00000006672 13312531357 013325 0000000 0000000 .TH EXTRACT 1 "Aug 7, 2012" "libextractor 1.0.0"
.\" $Id
.SH NAME
extract
\- determine meta-information about a file
.SH SYNOPSIS
.B extract
[
.B \-bgihLmnvV
]
[
.B \-l
.I library
]
[
.B \-p
.I type
]
[
.B \-x
.I type
]
.I file
\&...
.br
.SH DESCRIPTION
This manual page documents version 1.0.0 of the
.B extract
command.
.PP
.B extract
tests each file specified in the argument list in an attempt to infer meta\-information from it. Each file is subjected to the meta\-data extraction libraries from
.I libextractor.
.PP
libextractor classifies meta\-information (also referred to as keywords) into types. A list of all types can be obtained with the
.B \-L
option.
.SH OPTIONS
.TP 8
.B \-b
Display the output in BiBTeX format.
.TP 8
.B \-g
Use grep\-friendly output (all keywords on a single line for each file). Use the verbose option to print the filename first, followed by the keywords. Use the verbose option twice to also display the keyword types. This option will not print keyword types or non\-textual metadata.
.TP 8
.B \-h
Print a brief summary of the options.
.TP 8
.B \-i
Run plugins in\-process (for debugging). By default, each plugin is run in its own process.
.TP 8
.BI \-l " libraries"
Use the specified libraries to extract keywords. The general format of libraries is .I [[\-]LIBRARYNAME[:[\-]LIBRARYNAME]*] where LIBRARYNAME is a libextractor compatible library and typically of the form .Ijpeg\. The minus before the libraryname indicates that this library should be removed from the existing list. To run only a few selected plugins, use \-l in combination with \-n.
.TP 8
.B \-L
Print a list of all known keyword types.
.TP 8
.B \-m
Load the file into memory and perform extraction from memory (for debugging).
.TP 8
.B \-n
Do not use the default set of extractors (typically all standard extractors, currently mp3, ogg, jpg, gif, png, tiff, real, html, pdf and mime\-types), use only the extractors specified with the .B \-l option.
.TP
.B \-p " type"
Print only the keywords matching the specified type. By default, all keywords that are found and not removed as duplicates are printed.
.TP 8
.B \-v
Print the version number and exit.
.TP 8
.B \-V
Be verbose. This option can be specified multiple times to increase verbosity further.
.TP 8
.I \-x " type"
Exclude keywords of the specified type from the output. By default, all keywords that are found and not removed as duplicates are printed.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR libextractor (3)
\- description of the libextractor library
.br
.SH EXAMPLES
.nf
$ extract test/test.jpg
comment \- (C) 2001 by Christian Grothoff, using gimp 1.2 1
mimetype \- image/jpeg
$ extract \-V \-x comment test/test.jpg
Keywords for file test/test.jpg:
mimetype \- image/jpeg
$ extract \-p comment test/test.jpg
comment \- (C) 2001 by Christian Grothoff, using gimp 1.2 1
$ extract \-nV \-l png.so \-p comment test/test.jpg test/test.png
Keywords for file test/test.jpg:
Keywords for file test/test.png:
comment \- Testing keyword extraction
.SH "LEGAL NOTICE"
libextractor and the extract tool are released under the GPL. libextractor is a GNU package.
.SH BUGS
A couple of file\-formats (on the order of 10^3) are not recognized...
.SH AUTHORS
.B extract
was originally written by Christian Grothoff and Vidyut Samanta . Use to contact the current maintainer(s).
.SH AVAILABILITY
You can obtain the original author's latest version from http://www.gnu.org/software/libextractor/
libextractor-1.9/doc/stamp-vti 0000644 0001750 0001750 00000000131 13430046036 013414 0000000 0000000 @set UPDATED 20 June 2018
@set UPDATED-MONTH June 2018
@set EDITION 1.9
@set VERSION 1.9
libextractor-1.9/config.rpath 0000755 0001750 0001750 00000037444 13312531357 013335 0000000 0000000 #! /bin/sh
# Output a system dependent set of variables, describing how to set the
# run time search path of shared libraries in an executable.
#
# Copyright 1996-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
# Taken from GNU libtool, 2001
# Originally by Gordon Matzigkeit , 1996
#
# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation gives
# unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, with or without
# modifications, as long as this notice is preserved.
#
# The first argument passed to this file is the canonical host specification,
# CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-OPERATING_SYSTEM
# or
# CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-KERNEL-OPERATING_SYSTEM
# The environment variables CC, GCC, LDFLAGS, LD, with_gnu_ld
# should be set by the caller.
#
# The set of defined variables is at the end of this script.
# Known limitations:
# - On IRIX 6.5 with CC="cc", the run time search patch must not be longer
# than 256 bytes, otherwise the compiler driver will dump core. The only
# known workaround is to choose shorter directory names for the build
# directory and/or the installation directory.
# All known linkers require a `.a' archive for static linking (except MSVC,
# which needs '.lib').
libext=a
shrext=.so
host="$1"
host_cpu=`echo "$host" | sed 's/^\([^-]*\)-\([^-]*\)-\(.*\)$/\1/'`
host_vendor=`echo "$host" | sed 's/^\([^-]*\)-\([^-]*\)-\(.*\)$/\2/'`
host_os=`echo "$host" | sed 's/^\([^-]*\)-\([^-]*\)-\(.*\)$/\3/'`
# Code taken from libtool.m4's _LT_CC_BASENAME.
for cc_temp in $CC""; do
case $cc_temp in
compile | *[\\/]compile | ccache | *[\\/]ccache ) ;;
distcc | *[\\/]distcc | purify | *[\\/]purify ) ;;
\-*) ;;
*) break;;
esac
done
cc_basename=`echo "$cc_temp" | sed -e 's%^.*/%%'`
# Code taken from libtool.m4's AC_LIBTOOL_PROG_COMPILER_PIC.
wl=
if test "$GCC" = yes; then
wl='-Wl,'
else
case "$host_os" in
aix*)
wl='-Wl,'
;;
darwin*)
case $cc_basename in
xlc*)
wl='-Wl,'
;;
esac
;;
mingw* | pw32* | os2*)
;;
hpux9* | hpux10* | hpux11*)
wl='-Wl,'
;;
irix5* | irix6* | nonstopux*)
wl='-Wl,'
;;
newsos6)
;;
linux*)
case $cc_basename in
icc* | ecc*)
wl='-Wl,'
;;
pgcc | pgf77 | pgf90)
wl='-Wl,'
;;
ccc*)
wl='-Wl,'
;;
como)
wl='-lopt='
;;
*)
case `$CC -V 2>&1 | sed 5q` in
*Sun\ C*)
wl='-Wl,'
;;
esac
;;
esac
;;
osf3* | osf4* | osf5*)
wl='-Wl,'
;;
sco3.2v5*)
;;
solaris*)
wl='-Wl,'
;;
sunos4*)
wl='-Qoption ld '
;;
sysv4 | sysv4.2uw2* | sysv4.3* | sysv5*)
wl='-Wl,'
;;
sysv4*MP*)
;;
unicos*)
wl='-Wl,'
;;
uts4*)
;;
esac
fi
# Code taken from libtool.m4's AC_LIBTOOL_PROG_LD_SHLIBS.
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec=
hardcode_libdir_separator=
hardcode_direct=no
hardcode_minus_L=no
case "$host_os" in
cygwin* | mingw* | pw32*)
# FIXME: the MSVC++ port hasn't been tested in a loooong time
# When not using gcc, we currently assume that we are using
# Microsoft Visual C++.
if test "$GCC" != yes; then
with_gnu_ld=no
fi
;;
interix*)
# we just hope/assume this is gcc and not c89 (= MSVC++)
with_gnu_ld=yes
;;
openbsd*)
with_gnu_ld=no
;;
esac
ld_shlibs=yes
if test "$with_gnu_ld" = yes; then
# Set some defaults for GNU ld with shared library support. These
# are reset later if shared libraries are not supported. Putting them
# here allows them to be overridden if necessary.
# Unlike libtool, we use -rpath here, not --rpath, since the documented
# option of GNU ld is called -rpath, not --rpath.
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-rpath ${wl}$libdir'
case "$host_os" in
aix3* | aix4* | aix5*)
# On AIX/PPC, the GNU linker is very broken
if test "$host_cpu" != ia64; then
ld_shlibs=no
fi
;;
amigaos*)
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-L$libdir'
hardcode_minus_L=yes
# Samuel A. Falvo II reports
# that the semantics of dynamic libraries on AmigaOS, at least up
# to version 4, is to share data among multiple programs linked
# with the same dynamic library. Since this doesn't match the
# behavior of shared libraries on other platforms, we cannot use
# them.
ld_shlibs=no
;;
beos*)
if $LD --help 2>&1 | grep ': supported targets:.* elf' > /dev/null; then
:
else
ld_shlibs=no
fi
;;
cygwin* | mingw* | pw32*)
# hardcode_libdir_flag_spec is actually meaningless, as there is
# no search path for DLLs.
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-L$libdir'
if $LD --help 2>&1 | grep 'auto-import' > /dev/null; then
:
else
ld_shlibs=no
fi
;;
interix3*)
hardcode_direct=no
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-rpath,$libdir'
;;
linux*)
if $LD --help 2>&1 | grep ': supported targets:.* elf' > /dev/null; then
:
else
ld_shlibs=no
fi
;;
netbsd*)
;;
solaris*)
if $LD -v 2>&1 | grep 'BFD 2\.8' > /dev/null; then
ld_shlibs=no
elif $LD --help 2>&1 | grep ': supported targets:.* elf' > /dev/null; then
:
else
ld_shlibs=no
fi
;;
sysv5* | sco3.2v5* | sco5v6* | unixware* | OpenUNIX*)
case `$LD -v 2>&1` in
*\ [01].* | *\ 2.[0-9].* | *\ 2.1[0-5].*)
ld_shlibs=no
;;
*)
if $LD --help 2>&1 | grep ': supported targets:.* elf' > /dev/null; then
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='`test -z "$SCOABSPATH" && echo ${wl}-rpath,$libdir`'
else
ld_shlibs=no
fi
;;
esac
;;
sunos4*)
hardcode_direct=yes
;;
*)
if $LD --help 2>&1 | grep ': supported targets:.* elf' > /dev/null; then
:
else
ld_shlibs=no
fi
;;
esac
if test "$ld_shlibs" = no; then
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec=
fi
else
case "$host_os" in
aix3*)
# Note: this linker hardcodes the directories in LIBPATH if there
# are no directories specified by -L.
hardcode_minus_L=yes
if test "$GCC" = yes; then
# Neither direct hardcoding nor static linking is supported with a
# broken collect2.
hardcode_direct=unsupported
fi
;;
aix4* | aix5*)
if test "$host_cpu" = ia64; then
# On IA64, the linker does run time linking by default, so we don't
# have to do anything special.
aix_use_runtimelinking=no
else
aix_use_runtimelinking=no
# Test if we are trying to use run time linking or normal
# AIX style linking. If -brtl is somewhere in LDFLAGS, we
# need to do runtime linking.
case $host_os in aix4.[23]|aix4.[23].*|aix5*)
for ld_flag in $LDFLAGS; do
if (test $ld_flag = "-brtl" || test $ld_flag = "-Wl,-brtl"); then
aix_use_runtimelinking=yes
break
fi
done
;;
esac
fi
hardcode_direct=yes
hardcode_libdir_separator=':'
if test "$GCC" = yes; then
case $host_os in aix4.[012]|aix4.[012].*)
collect2name=`${CC} -print-prog-name=collect2`
if test -f "$collect2name" && \
strings "$collect2name" | grep resolve_lib_name >/dev/null
then
# We have reworked collect2
hardcode_direct=yes
else
# We have old collect2
hardcode_direct=unsupported
hardcode_minus_L=yes
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-L$libdir'
hardcode_libdir_separator=
fi
;;
esac
fi
# Begin _LT_AC_SYS_LIBPATH_AIX.
echo 'int main () { return 0; }' > conftest.c
${CC} ${LDFLAGS} conftest.c -o conftest
aix_libpath=`dump -H conftest 2>/dev/null | sed -n -e '/Import File Strings/,/^$/ { /^0/ { s/^0 *\(.*\)$/\1/; p; }
}'`
if test -z "$aix_libpath"; then
aix_libpath=`dump -HX64 conftest 2>/dev/null | sed -n -e '/Import File Strings/,/^$/ { /^0/ { s/^0 *\(.*\)$/\1/; p; }
}'`
fi
if test -z "$aix_libpath"; then
aix_libpath="/usr/lib:/lib"
fi
rm -f conftest.c conftest
# End _LT_AC_SYS_LIBPATH_AIX.
if test "$aix_use_runtimelinking" = yes; then
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-blibpath:$libdir:'"$aix_libpath"
else
if test "$host_cpu" = ia64; then
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-R $libdir:/usr/lib:/lib'
else
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-blibpath:$libdir:'"$aix_libpath"
fi
fi
;;
amigaos*)
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-L$libdir'
hardcode_minus_L=yes
# see comment about different semantics on the GNU ld section
ld_shlibs=no
;;
bsdi[45]*)
;;
cygwin* | mingw* | pw32*)
# When not using gcc, we currently assume that we are using
# Microsoft Visual C++.
# hardcode_libdir_flag_spec is actually meaningless, as there is
# no search path for DLLs.
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec=' '
libext=lib
;;
darwin* | rhapsody*)
hardcode_direct=no
if test "$GCC" = yes ; then
:
else
case $cc_basename in
xlc*)
;;
*)
ld_shlibs=no
;;
esac
fi
;;
dgux*)
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-L$libdir'
;;
freebsd1*)
ld_shlibs=no
;;
freebsd2.2*)
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-R$libdir'
hardcode_direct=yes
;;
freebsd2*)
hardcode_direct=yes
hardcode_minus_L=yes
;;
freebsd* | kfreebsd*-gnu | dragonfly*)
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-R$libdir'
hardcode_direct=yes
;;
hpux9*)
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}+b ${wl}$libdir'
hardcode_libdir_separator=:
hardcode_direct=yes
# hardcode_minus_L: Not really in the search PATH,
# but as the default location of the library.
hardcode_minus_L=yes
;;
hpux10*)
if test "$with_gnu_ld" = no; then
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}+b ${wl}$libdir'
hardcode_libdir_separator=:
hardcode_direct=yes
# hardcode_minus_L: Not really in the search PATH,
# but as the default location of the library.
hardcode_minus_L=yes
fi
;;
hpux11*)
if test "$with_gnu_ld" = no; then
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}+b ${wl}$libdir'
hardcode_libdir_separator=:
case $host_cpu in
hppa*64*|ia64*)
hardcode_direct=no
;;
*)
hardcode_direct=yes
# hardcode_minus_L: Not really in the search PATH,
# but as the default location of the library.
hardcode_minus_L=yes
;;
esac
fi
;;
irix5* | irix6* | nonstopux*)
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-rpath ${wl}$libdir'
hardcode_libdir_separator=:
;;
netbsd*)
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-R$libdir'
hardcode_direct=yes
;;
newsos6)
hardcode_direct=yes
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-rpath ${wl}$libdir'
hardcode_libdir_separator=:
;;
openbsd*)
hardcode_direct=yes
if test -z "`echo __ELF__ | $CC -E - | grep __ELF__`" || test "$host_os-$host_cpu" = "openbsd2.8-powerpc"; then
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-rpath,$libdir'
else
case "$host_os" in
openbsd[01].* | openbsd2.[0-7] | openbsd2.[0-7].*)
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-R$libdir'
;;
*)
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-rpath,$libdir'
;;
esac
fi
;;
os2*)
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-L$libdir'
hardcode_minus_L=yes
;;
osf3*)
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-rpath ${wl}$libdir'
hardcode_libdir_separator=:
;;
osf4* | osf5*)
if test "$GCC" = yes; then
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-rpath ${wl}$libdir'
else
# Both cc and cxx compiler support -rpath directly
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-rpath $libdir'
fi
hardcode_libdir_separator=:
;;
solaris*)
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-R$libdir'
;;
sunos4*)
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-L$libdir'
hardcode_direct=yes
hardcode_minus_L=yes
;;
sysv4)
case $host_vendor in
sni)
hardcode_direct=yes # is this really true???
;;
siemens)
hardcode_direct=no
;;
motorola)
hardcode_direct=no #Motorola manual says yes, but my tests say they lie
;;
esac
;;
sysv4.3*)
;;
sysv4*MP*)
if test -d /usr/nec; then
ld_shlibs=yes
fi
;;
sysv4*uw2* | sysv5OpenUNIX* | sysv5UnixWare7.[01].[10]* | unixware7*)
;;
sysv5* | sco3.2v5* | sco5v6*)
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='`test -z "$SCOABSPATH" && echo ${wl}-R,$libdir`'
hardcode_libdir_separator=':'
;;
uts4*)
hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-L$libdir'
;;
*)
ld_shlibs=no
;;
esac
fi
# Check dynamic linker characteristics
# Code taken from libtool.m4's AC_LIBTOOL_SYS_DYNAMIC_LINKER.
libname_spec='lib$name'
case "$host_os" in
aix3*)
;;
aix4* | aix5*)
;;
amigaos*)
;;
beos*)
;;
bsdi[45]*)
;;
cygwin* | mingw* | pw32*)
shrext=.dll
;;
darwin* | rhapsody*)
shrext=.dylib
;;
dgux*)
;;
freebsd1*)
;;
kfreebsd*-gnu)
;;
freebsd* | dragonfly*)
;;
gnu*)
;;
hpux9* | hpux10* | hpux11*)
case $host_cpu in
ia64*)
shrext=.so
;;
hppa*64*)
shrext=.sl
;;
*)
shrext=.sl
;;
esac
;;
interix3*)
;;
irix5* | irix6* | nonstopux*)
case "$host_os" in
irix5* | nonstopux*)
libsuff= shlibsuff=
;;
*)
case $LD in
*-32|*"-32 "|*-melf32bsmip|*"-melf32bsmip ") libsuff= shlibsuff= ;;
*-n32|*"-n32 "|*-melf32bmipn32|*"-melf32bmipn32 ") libsuff=32 shlibsuff=N32 ;;
*-64|*"-64 "|*-melf64bmip|*"-melf64bmip ") libsuff=64 shlibsuff=64 ;;
*) libsuff= shlibsuff= ;;
esac
;;
esac
;;
linux*oldld* | linux*aout* | linux*coff*)
;;
linux*)
;;
knetbsd*-gnu)
;;
netbsd*)
;;
newsos6)
;;
nto-qnx*)
;;
openbsd*)
;;
os2*)
libname_spec='$name'
shrext=.dll
;;
osf3* | osf4* | osf5*)
;;
solaris*)
;;
sunos4*)
;;
sysv4 | sysv4.3*)
;;
sysv4*MP*)
;;
sysv5* | sco3.2v5* | sco5v6* | unixware* | OpenUNIX* | sysv4*uw2*)
;;
uts4*)
;;
esac
sed_quote_subst='s/\(["`$\\]\)/\\\1/g'
escaped_wl=`echo "X$wl" | sed -e 's/^X//' -e "$sed_quote_subst"`
shlibext=`echo "$shrext" | sed -e 's,^\.,,'`
escaped_hardcode_libdir_flag_spec=`echo "X$hardcode_libdir_flag_spec" | sed -e 's/^X//' -e "$sed_quote_subst"`
LC_ALL=C sed -e 's/^\([a-zA-Z0-9_]*\)=/acl_cv_\1=/' <